Home

GC-2014 Gas Chromatograph INSTRUCTION MANUAL

1. 2 Set the dual FID 1 Press the DET key 2 Set Control mode as described below Temp t Flame oft Filter Time Constant 2 ms Control Mode 4 gt _ Single E signal Output Port Chi Background sig save Off Background sig comp Off Det sig subtraction Off Signal Attenuation xl Analog Signal Type Wide Ignite Set to Single L when the column is connected to the left L side of the dual FID and Single R when it is connected to the right R side GC 2014 53 29 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 4 Capillary TCD Analysis To perform capillary analysis using a unit with the TCD makeup gas needs to be supplied to the TCD joint that a column is connected to and carrier gas called reference gas also needs to be supplied to the TCD joint that a column is not connected In order to supply makeup gas install the detector adopter with purge P N 221 34012 91 to the TCD joint Connect the purge piping of the adopter to the dual INJ so that makeup gas is supplied from the dual AFC through the dual INJ The dual AFC is off the line and operates as an independent mass flow controller Reference gas is supplied from the dual AFC when the dual INJ and TCD are connected with a MF MF joint Detector adopter MF MF with purge beh piping Column Dual INJ Dual AFC
2. Flow DET Hi i g Presa kPa 37 0 Flom te Ae MakeUp Presa kPa 75 8 Flow s Gas Kind dir B Presa kPa a e Flora ana Fig 13 1 5 Setting the detector gas flows GC 2014 amp E 159 160 13 Detector 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID 13 1 4 2 Parameter list H2 Range 0 0 200 0 ml min Default 40 0 ml min optimal flow rate MAKE UP Range 0 0 100 0 ml min Default 30 0 ml min optimal flow rate Makeup gas is inert gas to be supplied to the detector to optimize its sensitivity during capillary analysis Nitrogen and helium can be used for the FID Using nitrogen is recommended because it offers higher sensitivity Set the value to zero for packed analysis GAS TYPE Selection N2 He Ar Default He Set the type of gas used as the makeup gas Do not use hydrogen for make up gas Air Range 0 0 1000 0 ml min Default 400 0 ml min optimal flow rate 13 1 4 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section witches screens to set detector gas for the left L and right R side Next Flow peana during the dual mode of ie dual FID with e a 12 4 Select Off to stop gas flow On Off Select On to restart the gas flow 2 Default value is On Offset Performs offset calibration of APC sensor 3 6 This calibration improves the reproducibility of results GC 2014 13 Detector 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID
3. Code Message cs 1002 COL temp exceed the limit Yes 1003 INJ1 temp exceed the limit Yes 1004 DET1 temp exceed the limit Yes 1005 INJ2 temp exceed the limit Yes 1006 DET2 temp exceed the limit Yes 1007 AUX3 temp exceed the limit Yes 1008 AUX4 temp exceed the limit Yes 1009 AUX5 temp exceed the limit Yes These messages appear when the maximum temperature limit has been exceeded Press Ignore Error and change the maximum limit temperature If the confirmation screen to reset the error appears again press Reset Error GC 2014 Temperature sensor errors 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages Code Message cs 1010 COL sensor is short circuit Yes 1011 INJ1 sensor is short circuit Yes 1012 DET1 sensor is short circuit Yes 1013 INJ2 sensor is short circuit Yes 1014 DET2 sensor is short circuit Yes 1015 AUX3 sensor is short circuit Yes 1016 AUX4 sensor is short circuit Yes 1017 AUX5 sensor is short circuit Yes 1018 COL sensor is down Yes 1019 INJ1 sensor is down Yes 1020 DET1 sensor is down Yes 1021 INJ2 sensor is down Yes 1022 DET2 sensor is down Yes 1023 AUX3 sensor is down Yes 1024 AUX4 sensor is down Yes 1025 AUX5 sensor is down Yes 1026 COL sensor is error Yes 1027 INJ1 sensor is error Yes 1028 DET1 sensor is error Yes 1029 INJ2 sensor is error Yes 1030 DET2 sensor is error Yes 1031 AUX3 sensor is error Yes
4. 42 GC 2014 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 3 5 Packed Analysis Using the Single DET 3 gt E Procedures to move the dual INJ AN WARNING Carry out the procedures after the injection port becomes 40 C or less to prevent burns AN CAUTION When cutting a heat insulator handle a cutting knife etc with care Move the dual INJ following the procedures below Perform backward processes to return it to its original position 1 Set the dual INJ temperature at room temperature or lower and wait until it becomes 40 C or less 2 Turn OFF the power of the GC unit 3 Remove the column connected to the dual INJ 4 Detach wiring connected to the dual INJ in order to improve workability 5 Unfasten the three screws that fasten the dual INJ Fig 3 5 2 a and pull the dual INJ upward Sems screws with a flat washer are used Be careful not to drop flat washers 6 Take out the heat insulator laid on the bottom of the dual INJ using tweezers or other similar tools Co 4 Single DET NE f Dual INJ i Screws sems screws flat washers f O o O OO joe 0 O N Y E Fig 3 5 2 a GC 2014 43 7 Cut out the heat i
5. 2 Set the dual AFC 1 Press the FLOW key 2 Set Control mode as described below Flow CARS Control Mode d Single L AN ee L Inlet Pra kPa GG L Col flow th KA A L Carrier gas bype Hz Set to Single L when the column is connected to the left L side of the dual INJ and Single R when it is connected to the right R side GC 2014 37 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 3 3 Single Column Packed FID Analysis 3 Set the dual FID 1 Press the DET key 2 Set Control mode as described below De 0n Temp tt 150 A Flame Filter Time Constant _ le Control Hode d Single L signal Output Port Chi Background sig save _ Ort Background sig comp _ Ort Det sig subtraction Off signal Attenuation xl Analog Signal Type Wide Set to Single L when the column is connected to the left L side of the dual FID and Single R when it is connected to the right R side 38 GC 2014 29 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 4 Packed TCD Analysis Connecting the left L sides and right R sides of the dual INJ and TCD with columns respectively allows for analysis with the dual column configuration Dual column configuration is used in following cases 1 Almost equal columns are connected on the left and right sides to balance TCD s zero point for analysis 2 Different
6. j INJECI AOC built in power source Fig 2 3 1 Connection of RS 232C cable GC 2014 23 24 2 Before Use 2 3 Outputting Digital Signals to a Personal Computer E Setting transmission parameters 1 Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION on the FUNC key screen and then select 3 TRANSMISSION PARAMETER 2 Set transmission parameters Protocol LEVEL3 Baud rate bps 115200 3 Press the PF2 key Apply NOTE Turning ON the power of the GC is not necessary GC 2014 ranemlselon Parameter Protocol db LEVELS Baud Rate bps Stop Bit Parity 115200 gt 2 Before Use 7 4 Connecting a RS 232C Cable to the Chromatopac C R8A Connecting the GC 2014 and Chromatopac C R8A with a RS 232C cable allows for various functions such as printing out parameters of the GC For detailed information about C R8A refer to its instruction manual E Connecting RS 232C cable Connect an optional RS 232C cable to the connector on the back of the GC Fig 2 4 1 NOTE AOC built in power source has the same connector Connect the cables correctly Back of the GC OPT LINKSTART OUTIREADY IN RS 2320 RS 232C OE ES O oo 7 AOC built in power source Fig 2 4 1 Connection of RS 232C cable GC 2014
7. Capillary column a During sampling time b After sampling time Fig 12 2 2 126 GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 2 12 2 1 Setting the temperature with INJ key 12 2 1 1 Screen description Press the INJ key to display the main screen shown in Fig 12 2 3 and to set the temperature of the injection port Injection Fort CARI The FILE ACTUAL SETTING Temp tt 1018 ext Inj mama Fig 12 2 3 INJ key main screen GC 2014 127 128 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 12 2 1 2 Parameter list TEMP Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the temperature of the injection port Keep the injection port temperature as low as is practical to increase the service life of the temperature sensor In order to instantly vaporize samples inside the injection port set the injection port temperature approximately 30 C above the column oven temperature final temp Due to the minute quantity of sample injected the sample vaporizes at temperatures lower than the boiling point of sample elements To set the injection port maximum temperature limit refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits in 16 6 GC Configuration 12 2 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reteionce section Print Prints the injection port temperature on Chromatopac y Toggles among the setup screeens if two or more injection ports
8. E FLOW indicator Color Status Meaning Off Temperature control is not performed Geen On All temperature controlled zones are ready Blinking Temperature program is running Yellow On One of the temperature controlled zones is not ready Blinking Temperature program is finished and system is being cooled Red On An error related to temperature control has occurred Color Status Meaning Off Gas control is not performed On All gas control lines are ready Green TE Pressure flow rate program is running it is sampling time or Blinking high pressure injection is occurring On One of the gas control lines is not ready Yellow Ne Pressure flow rate program is finished and default values are Blinking being set Red On An error related to gas control has occurred gt 6 Basic Key Operation i 2 Adjusting The Display NOTE In the following procedure Toggle V key indicates that V key is pressed while pressing and holding the Toggle key Turn the backlit LCD display on and off by pressing Toggle V to turn it off and Toggle A to turn it on When the keypad is not in use turning the backlit LCD display off is recommended to pro long the life of the display The display turns off automatically with the backlit display saver See 16 6 11 Other Settings When the display turns itself off turn it back on by pressing any key To adjust the contrast t
9. sample Wash a Number of Injection de Sample Size l _ 1 8 Pre Solvent Wash _ 48 solvent Wash nd Pumping __ Viscosity s _ 8 2 Dwell Time s 4 0 Inj Speed Plunger Fast ADC POWER On gt 2 Before Use a 6 Connecting the Relay Terminals By using the optional relay cable P N221 48568 91 relay that operates according to event commands can be used For detailed information about setting events refer to 16 3 Time Program or 16 5 Direct Operation For example if the cable is connected to 1 COM and 3 NO found in Fig 2 6 1 they are connected by EVENT91 and disconnected by EVENT 91 If it is connected to 1JCOM and 2 NC they will be connected by EVENT 91 and disconnected by EVENT91 Back of the GC OPT LINKSTART OUTIREADY IN 2 20 EME o Eau E 3h 23 li COM 1 Red Of s s Q EVENT91 NC 2 White E E L_ NO 3 Black o D O COM 4 Yellow y E O EVENT92 NC 5 Blue E L NO 6 Green y 0 AOC built in power source Fig 2 6 1 Connecting a relay cable GC 2014 29 30 EEE GC 2014 eee 29 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines a 1 Installation Location for Packed Columns Injection ports and detectors for packed
10. Next Ch Fig 16 6 12 AMC gas signal setup screen 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 7 6 Signal offset When you select Gain etc PF menu from the signal setup main screen the Gain and offset screen shown in Fig 16 6 12 appears Set the offset and the the detector signal gain here Select Sig Ch PF menu to set the gain and the offset for any signal other than defector signals such as temperature or pressure In addition you can set the time constant and the zero adjustment of the signal for each channel Gain and Offset chi Sul NN DE Sienal DET Gain _ 1 88 Gain 1 00 Offset Offset DE Signal ON Time Constant de Gain 1 06 Signal Offset 0 A 000000 Gain 1 04 Offset 5 Time Constant ACES Signal a Mi snal 0000 Gain 1 0 Offset a Zero Adj ZeroFree Fig 16 6 13 Detector signal gain and offset screen Range Default Gain offset 0 00 100 00 1 00 999999 9999999 0 Time constant 4ms 5ms 10ms 20ms 50ms 50ms 100ms 200ms 500ms 1s 2s GC 2014 gt 245 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 8 Customizing Component Names 16 6 8 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen amd then select 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION the Name customization screen shown in Fig 16 6 13 appears Specify the names of GC components 8 characters alphanumeri
11. Select an item to be output from each area pignal setting Chanel lt The currently set channel No Det Sig Flo Is Temp Carrier Gas SHC Gas E He Flow MakeUp Pres MakeUp Flow Air Press Air Flow DETH1 DFID L LINE DTCD L DTCD R DETH4 JReturn Next Ch sd Fig 16 6 10 Detector gas signal setup screen is displayed GC 2014 gt 243 e 16 Special Functions 7 16 6 GC Configuration E APC gas If you select the APC gas for the flow signal selection to display the screen shown in Fig 16 6 11 The currently set channel No is displayed Channel 1 Temp Signal Setting Det Sig E AMC Gas Select an item to be output APC APC 3 from each area APC 4 APC 5 APC 6 AFC 7 AFC 8 AFC 9 AFC 10 APC 11 AFC 12 AFC 18 AFC i4 APC 15 APC 16 APC 173 AFC 18 Return Next Ch Fig 16 6 11 APC gas signal setup screen E AMC gas If you select the AMC gas for the flow signal selection the screen shown in Fig 16 6 12 appears The currently set channel No is displayed Channel 1 Temp Signal Setting Det Sig Flow signal Select Flom iil Carrier Gas Detector Gas 244 Select an item to be output from each area GC 2014 AF AM CAM gt Ble AM AM AM a hoe ha 1 ha AM Gas Presa L
12. PF menu Description Reiuielcs section Temp Prog Sets the column oven temperature for the clean up program 11 2 Sets the column inlet pressure for the clean up program 12 5 5 Press Prog It is displayed when the control mode is pressure on the FLOW key screen of the AFC Sets the flow rate for the clean up program 12 5 6 Sets the column flow rate program for the DAFC and the total flow rate Flow Prog program for the AFC Display is possible for the DAFC and when the control mode is set at flow rate on the FLOW key screen of the AFC Run Displayed only while GC is in system ON status Immediately runs the clean up program Sto Stops clean up Ss P This item is displayed only when the clean up program is in progress Next Line Displays the clean up program set up screen for another analytical flow line GC 2014 85 86 29 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM A 3 Specifying Start Procedures 7 3 1 Screen description Select Start Seg PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen to display the start procedure setup screen shown in Fig 7 3 1 On this screen set whether the system automatically starts Auto Start when the power is next turned on or whether the system does not start until Start GC PF menu is pressed Manual Start Alternatively only carrier gas flow is turned on the next time the power is turned on To start the system select Start GC PF menu as for a manual start This is kn
13. psi Set up it with the value that consults the following table and transformed into kPa kPa bar psi 300 500 3 00 5 00 43 5 72 5 500 900 5 00 9 00 72 5 130 5 900 980 9 00 9 80 130 5 142 1 e The pressure axis on the screen after pressing MONIT key is displayed in the value of kPa regardless of the pressure unit sets e The setting value measured value of the primary pressure of the diagnosis result of the standard diagnosis is displayed in the value of kPa regardless of the pressure unit sets e The display printing of each log file is displayed in the value of kPa regardless of the pressure unit sets BEEP VOLUME Selection Off Low Mid Hig Default Low BEEP TONE Selection Lo Hi Default Hi Use a different tone for different GCs to be able to discern which GC has a problem ATMOSPHERIC COMPENSATION Selection On Off Default Off Select On to compensate for higher altitudes when in linear velocity mode ZERO AT READY Selection On Off Default On Set Or for the gas chromatograph to automatically perform zero adjustment when the GC is ready POLARITY IN READY Selection Open Close Default Open Set the polarity of GC ready signal SPL PRIMARY PRESS Selection 300 500 kPa 500 900 kPa 900 980 kPa Default 500 900 kPa Select the pressure range of the carrier gas cylinder If the wrong range is selected error messages are not d
14. 168 EE GC 2014 eee 13 Detector 13 2 Thermal Conductivity Detector TCD 3 gt 13 2 3 TCD Zero Point Adjustment Press Zero Adj PF menu on the MONIT key main screen to automatically start zero point adjustment When the TCD is used the balance between sample and reference sides becomes off after a column is replaced so the baseline may go off scale In this case carry out a zero coarse adjustment following the procedures described below NOTE TCD zero coarse adjustment is usually unnecessary when starting the unit after stopping it to leave the lab on the previous day It takes a while for the TCD baseline to stabilize Even if the baseline is off scale when starting the unit it goes close to zero when it stabilizes in many cases Wait until the baseline stabilizes 1 Press Zero Free PF menu on the MONIT key main screen 2 Turn the TCD zero coarse adjustment control shown on Fig 13 2 4 to make the baseline close to zero It takes a while for the baseline to move after the control is turned Turn the control slowly TCD zero coarse adjustment control Fig 13 2 4 3 Press Zero Adj PF menu on the MONIT key main screen GC 2014 169 3 13 Detector 1 3 3 Filter Signal Time Constant Selecting the filter time constant Normally analysis can be performed with the time constant set to the default value dual FID TCD 1 s single FID 200 ms In order to improve the S N ratio the ti
15. END appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp If you move the cursor to END and set any numeric value other than 0 the final flow rate and time for that ramp can be entered 12 1 4 3 PF menu PF menu Description paella Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position pa Ins Line Inserts a line above the line that the cursor is positioned Print Prints the flow rate program through a Chromatopac on GC 2014 125 3 12 Injection Port 1 2 2 Split Splitless Injection System E Split injection system In a split injection system only a portion of the sample injected into the injection port is introduced into the capillary column The remaining sample is sent to the split line due to high sample volume or concentration cp PURGE TFC CARRIER PURGE VENT Capillary column Fig 12 2 1 E Splitless injection system The splitless injection system is used to analyze samples of low concentration In a splitless injection system the split vent is closed and the initial temperature of the column oven is low Then after injection and once the vaporized sample has moved to the column the split vent is open and the column temperature increased so that the condensed sample inside the column is vaporized again and separated y PURGE spLit ESC Ad SPLIT VENT Capillary column q PURGE PURGE VENT FC CARRIER PURGE VENT TFC CARRIER
16. DET APC Ho 2 Unit Type PASS Unit Type Sessa kr kr JRetuen Jketrn T Manual flow controller APC Fig 16 7 5 Setup for detector gas flow controller NOTE Changes are not in effect until the GC has been turned off and on Manual flow controller slot numbers are MSLOT1 to 7 from the left viewed from the back of the unit AFC and APC slot numbers are SLOT2 to 6 from the left viewed from the back of the unit SLOT1 is not available 260 GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance gt 16 7 5 INITIALIZATION 16 7 5 1 Screen description Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen and then select 3 INITIALIZE to display the Initialization screen shown in Fig 16 7 6 When you move the arrow cursor and press the ENTER key the initialization confirmation screen Fig 16 7 7 appears On this screen press the INIT PF menu key to initialize the selected item Initialization Initialize Configuration Initialize Configuration Configuration parameters F Initialize Installation are initialized with PF2 Initialize RAM El Initialize all select function Return Fig 16 7 6 Initialization menu screen Fig 16 7 7 Initialization confirmation screen 16 7 5 2 Parameter list INITIALIZE CONFIGURATION This item initializes configuration settings such as heated zone temperature limits and ready check parameter
17. Length 30m 60m 1 D of column Film thickness 0 25mm 0 25um 100kPa 210kPa 0 32mm 0 25um 60kPa 120kPa 0 53mm 1 5um 20kPa 40kPa Example 2 Column oven temperature 200 C carrier gas helium Length 30m 60m 1 D of column Film thickness 0 25mm 0 25um 130kPa 275kPa 0 32mm 0 25um 80kPa 160kPa 0 53mm 1 5um 30kPa 60kPa NOTE Fig 12 5 2 shows the relationship between the column flow rate and the column inlet pressure Column flow rate ml mn nN 0 Pp OT O N DO CO ak 1 D 0 53mm Length 30m Carrier gas helium 20 C Column flow rate is in inversely proportional to the column length 1 D 0 32mm Length 30m Linear velocity NX 30cm s N 1 D 0 25mm Length 30m 50 100 Column inlet pressure kPa x 103 Column outlet pressure atmospheric pressure kPa 0 _ 60744 P Po 2 Po 256uL Po Fc Column flow rate ml min d Column I D mm L Column length m P Column inlet pressure kPa Po H Viscosity coefficient 19 4uPases helium 20 C Fig 12 5 2 GC 2014 151 620 GC 2014 eee gt 13 Detector 1 3 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID 13 1 1 Principle of FID operation In the hydrogen flame ionization detector FID hydrogen gas is mixed with the column outlet gas at a certain ratio as shown in Fig 13 1 1 The gas mixture combusts in the air atmosphere An electrode exists at each end of t
18. The screen shown in Fig 14 2 5 appears Up to 50 logs are saved If the number of logs exceeds 50 existing logs are deleted starting from the oldest Parameter Log Time changed Name Value 43 12 62 08 P1DD 5999 8 12 03 00 CHAF a 48 12 86 00 APRY 20 56 8 12 0 00 CFPS 120 6 43 12 08 06 DLW 739 08 12 8 0a APGI 35 8 12 8 8 FTVS 128 43 12 88 00 SSYZ 166 43 12 08 08 SCCI 300 43 12 82 00 HAPR 300 0 48 12 87 55 GEPR 1 4 8 1 02 57 CITP 04 4 Estuni lear Log Print Fig 14 2 5 Parameter log screen NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left and right arrow keys 2 PF menu PF menu Description Releiencs section Deletes all displayed logs Clear Lo When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the 9 message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the parameter log to a Chromatopac A GC 2014 3 gt 185 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 6 Error log When 4 ERROR LOC is selected the log of all errors which have been displayed is shown 1 Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from of the DIAG key main screen then select 4 ERROR to display the screen shown in Fig 14 2 6 Up to 100 logs are saved If the number of logs exceeds 100 existing logs are deleted starting from the oldest Error Log T
19. 0 indicates that the setting is not given SAMPLE Inject sample The specified sample vial No is analysed Without sample Vials are not used for samples Instead samples are introduced from a gas sampler with a valve GC FILE NO Range FILE 0 9 Default FILEO Set the file No of the GC method to be used CHANNEL NO Range Ch1 Ch2 Default Ch 1 Set the channel No connecting the GC to the Chromatopac This setting is ignored when using GC solution software DATA PROCESSOR FILE NO Range FILE 0 9 Default FILEO Specify a date processor Chromatopac date integration file This setting is ignored when using GC solution software NUMBER OF INJECTION Range 0 99 Default 0 Set the number of times to inject each sample SAMPLE TYPE Unknown Select this item to analyze a sample of unknown concentration Analyze a standard and create a calibration curve before analyzing an unknown sample Standard Select this item to analyze a standard of known concentration SLOPE TEST Range On Off Default Off When Or is selected the slope test is performed before running the batch schedule CLEAN UP Range On Off Default Off When Or is selected clean up is performed before running the batch schedule 222 GC 2014 16 2 6 PF menu 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule PF menu Description pia Finish Validates the schedule ni Prev Page Returns to previous setup screen n Next Page Moves to se
20. 13 1 5 Igniting and Extinguishing the FID 13 1 5 1 Confirmation prior to FID ignition Confirm the following points prior to FID ignition 1 Connect the column 2 Specify the FID to be ignited in a flow line Refer to 8 3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config Set the FID to be ignited to On Refer to 13 1 2 Setting the Detector Turn the main valve of the gas cylinder to supply gas 5 Set the flow rate of the detector gas For APC press On Off PF menu on the screen to set the detector gas so that all gas control is turned on Refer to 13 1 3 Setting the Detector Gas manual flow controller or 13 1 4 Setting the detector gas flows APC Po 13 1 5 2 FID ignition procedures E Automatic ignition The system starts and the FID is ignited automatically 1 Press the SYSTEM key and set the following parameters Change other parameters if necessary START TEMP DET Yes DETECTOR On AUTO IGNITE On NOT READY uence Next Time Current File E FILES File Load FILE Manual Start Manual Start When next power on Start Flow Start Time min Ae Start Temp Det Yeg Detector On Auto 1gnite4 On Start Flow Start Time min 0 0 Start Temp Det Yes Detector On Auta ignite lt p gt On Clean Up a eat Clean Up Off Off Stand By Stand Ey Clean Up a Main screen b Start Seq PF menu Fi
21. Heater Name Customization Port Type Hame INJ1i SPL INJ2 DINJ DINJ DETi DFID DFID DETS DTCD DTCD AUS tr AA fa Se AS f SS EREC DE 604011 GEL O OPS STU EWA O Do 6eynbol a NumerChr LowerChr Fig 16 6 16 Heater port name setup screen 16 6 8 4 Carrier Name Customization Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION and finally select CARRIER NAME CUSTOMIZ to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 17 To change the names refer to 6 3 5 Changing item names in 6 3 Basic Key Operations Carrier Name Customization Port Type Name CARL 4FC PU CARE DAFC CARE CARS CARS EREC VEF GHI GEL OM OPS TU EY O Do 6eynbol a NumerChr LowerChr Fig 16 6 17 Carrier name setup screen GC 2014 247 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 8 5 AUX APC Name Customization Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION and finally 3 AUX APC NAME CUSTOMIZ to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 18 e AUX APC Name Customization be named Port Name APC1 APCS APCE APCS APCS APC APC To change the names refer to APCS APCS 6 3 5 Changing item names FCA AFCA in 6 3 Basic Key Operations APET T APCS 9 APCQ 9 EHEC DE GHI JEL EH OPS STU EWA Ez Do 6eynbol a NumerChr L
22. gt to specify the ana lytical flow line 1 4 to which the component belongs Press Enter to validate the selection When two injection ports or two option units are selected for a same line the previous unit setting is cancelled Line Configuration TT Injector TTT on SPL H DINJ A Detector TTT E DFID H DTCD TUM Op tion TT AoC OCE Fig 8 3 1 Line configuration setup screen NOTE DINJ is not displayed on the line configuration setup screen when AMC LR is set for DAFC unit on OTHER CONFIGURATIONS 16 6 11 AUX temperature control AUX APC AUX AMC manual flow controllers and dual AFC set to AMC LR can be set and controlled regardless to flow line configuration settings GC 2014 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config E Line configuration examples SPL split splitless injection port and DINJ dual packed INJ are installed as the injection port DFID dual hydrogen flame ionization detector and DTCD thermal conductivity detector are installed as the detector 1 To use only a SPL and FID Select the SPL and DFID for Line 1 In this case only the temperature of the SPL and DFID will be controlled Carrier gas including detector gas if APC is used for detector gas will be supplied Mi 4 gt Line Configura
23. 209 Turns On AMC9 flow controller Turns Off AMC9 flow controller 210 Turns On AMC10 flow controller Turns Off AMC10 flow controller For dual AFC there are no gas saver splitter septum purge or high pressure injection modes 282 ME GC 2014 eee 9 18 Error Messages 1 8 1 Error Messages 18 1 1 This system is programmed to self diagnose certain errors When an error is detected an alarm sounds and one of the error messages shown below is displayed The detected errors are recorded in the Error Log For errors of which the CS column in the table below shows Yes a screen to confirm about resetting them appears When the confirmation screen appears select one of the following actions Reset Error Resets the system parameters restoring the conditions prior to the error System control resumes If the cause of the error has been corrected the error does not occur any more Ignore Error Select this to keep the system as it is for a while for some reason for example in order to remove the cause of the error Codes shown in the tables below identify errors Provide the code when calling service representative about an error These codes are also recorded in the error log System errors Power supply failure Code Message CS 0001 DC 5V is out of range No 0002 DC 24V is out of range No 0003 DC 15V is out of range No If the above error messages appear the hardw
24. Gas is controlled only for injection ports flow controllers specified as part of a line Examples If an injection port that a column is connected is not specified as part of a line carrier gas does not flow If the column s temperature rises in this condition the column may be damaged To keep feeding gas to units or maintain their temperature even though they will not be used for analysis for a while specify the units as part of a line Remove the units not in use from a line Examples If a detector without a column stays on a line it may damage TCD filament or cause an error such as FID ignition error If the setting for the flow controller is turned OFF without removing an injector port without a column from a line an error is detected and the protection mechanism works to lower the column temperature If a split splitless injection port SPL without a column is not removed from a line an error is detected and the protection mechanism works to lower the column temperature GC 2014 19 20 gt 2 Before Use x 2 Outputting Analog Signals to the Chromatopac GC 2014 can output analog signals for two channels and detector signals to be outputted to each channel can be set using keys When a detector is changed output can be changed using keys without changing the connection on the back of the GC E Connecting the Chromatopac signal cable Connect the attached Chromatopac signal cable to the connector ANALOG OUT1 or 2
25. I Tni B DW MOI Detector DFID IB DTCD I Option HH 2001 2002 2 Set the dual AFC 1 Press the FLOW key 2 Set Control mode to Dual Flow CARS Control Mode Dual AN ee L Inlet Pre kPa L Col flow ta WEA 50 0 L Carrier gas type He OT Rett R Inlet Prs kPs IR R Col flown IE 56 6 R Carrier gas type He GC 2014 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 3 4 Packed TCD Analysis 3 Set the TCD NOTE 1 Press the DET key 2 Set Signal polarity as described below The TCD L TCD R signal is outputted When a sample which a plus peak is detected is injected into the dual INJ L The TCD R TCD L signal is outputted When a sample which a plus peak is detected is injected into the dual INJ R letector DET 3 AD on Temp tt EE _ 200 0 Temp i MAS _ 200 0 slienal Polarity E Current m 3a Filter Time Constant la signal Output Port Chi Background sig save _ Ort Background sig comp _ oft Det sig subtraction off signal Attenuation xl Analog Signal Type Wide EIS EA TCD signals do not necessarily have a plus peak because they are determined by relationship of heat conduction between a substance
26. If you move the cursor or display another screen before pressing the ENTER key the value is deleted To clear a value before pressing the ENTER key press the CE key Changing a selection Parameters marked with lt j and gt are changed by making another selection Change the selection using the following procedure 1 Move the cursor to the item 2 Select a desired choice by pressing the lt and gt key 3 Press the ENTER key to validate the selection The selection change becomes valid when the ENTER key is pressed If you move the cursor or display another screen before pressing the ENTER key the change is not made To clean the selection before pressing the ENTER key press the CE key mn 3 Change the selection by Display Customization pressing the lt and gt key In this example the selection Inlet Pressure 15 changes in this order On gt Off gt On Column Flow Rate on Press the ENTER key to Linear Velocity oft validate the selection Fig 6 3 4 74 GC 2014 6 3 5 6 Basic Key Operation 6 3 Basic Key Operations Changing item names Customize file names and other names with alphanumeric characters and symbols Change the name using the following procedure 1 Move the cursor to an item to be changed using the A and V keys 2 Move the cursor to a character to be changed using the lt and gt keys 3 Input a cha
27. Select Sampler PF menu from the AOC main screen to display the sampler screen shown in Fig 15 1 4 Specify the options installed on the AOC such as sampler carousel When AOC1 and AOC2 are selected for the analytical line in Line configuration of the SET key both USE OF THE SAMPLER and USE OF THE SUB AOC are automatically set to Use Sampler Inactive Use of the Sampler lt p gt Use Use of the Sub AOC Not Use Ear Code Reader Not Use Fig 15 1 4 Sampler carousel and other options setup 15 1 11 Parameter list USE OF THE SAMPLER Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use USE OF THE SUB AOC Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use Set to Not Use because it is not used by GC 2014 BAR CODE READER Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use Select Use when the Bar Code reader is installed 202 GC 2014 29 15 Optional Devices 1 5 2 Setting AUX Temperature Temperature controller used for parts other than the column oven injection port and detector can be set 15 2 1 Screen description When an optional device such as heater is installed press the OPTION key to display the screen shown in Fig 15 2 1 If a different screen appears press the OPTION key again or NEXT PF menu to display the correct screen The screen toggles among AOC parameters AUX temperature gt AUX APC AUX AMC CRG screens in this order AUA Temperature Name ACTUAL
28. UVOL Aspiration volume during pumping 8 ul O 6 ul 1 8 ul O SLMD Using 3 Solvent Vials No 0 Yes 1 No 0 VIAL Vial size 1 5 ml 0 4mil 1 1 5 ml 0 CKTR With without tray check With 0 Without 1 Without 0 TANL Analysis time 0 655 0 TSTR Analysis start time 0 0 99 9 0 0 LSYR Syringe Volume ce a 1 10ul O GC 2014 275 276 17 Printing 17 2 AOC commands command Item Range Default name SAMU Use of the sampler Not use 0 Use 1 Not use 0 SUBU Use of the sub AOC Not use 0 Use 1 Not use 0 BARC Bar Code Reader Not use 0 Use 1 Not use 0 SPMD Distribution of sample for dual AOC 0 8 0 PAR1 Use of Same Param No 0 Yes 1 No 0 GLPM Setting of validation mode 0 1 0 GRPT Number of times of GLP sample discharge 1 99 50 GVOL GLP sample discharge volume 1 80 20 GPMP des of times of pumping after second 0 5 4 ATSP Automatic stop function Off 0 On 1 On 1 ARSG Ready signal polarity Open 0 Close 1 Open 0 TLET Rack Short 0 Long 1 Short 0 TSEL Rack position while sampler is used 0 2 1 1 Without autosampler short rack 1 6 Without autosampler long rack 1 12 With autosampler 1 150 GC 2014 NOTE Command names marked with cannot be set on the GC screen 29 17 Printing 1 YA 3 Program Parameters Press Print from a time program or Pre Run program to print the program as event No or parameter names This paragraph de
29. analytical line Current Sets current for the detector configured in the analytical line NOTE 2 Detector Zero Adj Turns on off zero adjustment for the detector configured in the analytical line Flame Ignites Extinguishes the flame Turns on off voltage feedback to make current constant for FTD FTD o configured in the analytical line Turns on off control of detector configured in the analytical line Detector controller 3 during analysis program Splitter Ctrl Opens closes splitter Flow Turn carrier gas septum purge detector gas APC and AMC AUX all Flow controller On Off AMC and AMC LR on off eter to NOTE 3 High press inj mode Turns high pressure injection mode on off Gas saver Turns gas saver function on off Temperaire INJ1 INJ2 DET1 DET2 Use a time program to change temperature of heated zones which P AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 cannot be programmed Specify the number of times to execute the GC program Then End of either the program stops or the next file is executed If greater than program 2 the choices are continuous or pause at each run For an NUMBER AOC select continuous When pause at each run is selected Stop OF TIMES the program executes continuously at set intervals OF RUN If another program such as a temperature program is running 0 FILE when time program execution time expires priority is given to 0 9 Load running the program When the current program finishes the time program sto
30. is set to On 16 2 3 PF menu PF menu Description dedo Start Starts the batch schedule Stop Stops the batch schedule A New Creates a new batch schedule ee Del line Deletes the line at the current cursor position E Print Prints the schedule to a Chromatopac GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule 16 2 4 Creating a new batch schedule Select New PF menu from the batch schedule screen to display the new batch schedule screen shown in Fig 16 2 2 Set an item using the A and V keys and ENTER key When Finish PF menu becomes available and the items have been set press Finish to validate the schedule At the top of the screen the contents of the set schedule are displayed At the bottom of the screen the schedule can be edited Up to 100 lines are available per schedule Inactive Single 400 201 8 Vial GC DP INJ Mk CHD i 30 Chi 1i U 4 61 Chi 1 U Vial start vial Ho Ek Final vial No ME sample Inject sample Fig 16 2 2 New batch schedule screen GC 2014 gt 221 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule 16 2 5 Parameter list START VIAL NO Range Default O FINAL VIAL NO Range Default 0 1 With no auto sampler Short rack 1 6 Long rack 1 12 With auto sampler 1 150 maximum When the auto sampler is used the possible depends on the vial rack type and the number of racks The default
31. 0 FILEO Temp Honit t MEE Temp program total min 25 00 Rate Temptt Time min penn Init 60 9 _ 2 00 lat 5 Be 124 e 2 80 2nd 14 88 164 1 E Ae 2rd END 10 C min 120 C 2min 5 C min o o Q N 3 5 SS Equilibration Time min 2 8 Initial 1st stage 2nd stage PPLE AOE ENGEL ROEDORES temperature Del Line Ins Line Fan Off Fig 11 2 2 Temperature program Example 2 116 GC 2014 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program 11 2 Temperature Programs Multiple ramp temperature program with temp increase decrease Initial 1st temperature stage 200 C 5min 2nd stage 5 C min FILE 70 0 53 00 Rate Tempi Time tmin Temp program total min Init MER bl 2 80 lat 5 88 120 8 a Ae nd 18 08 200 8 E Ae 2rd 5 Ha TA 1 00 4th END 1min Equilibration Time mini a Fan Off Del Linef Ins Line Fig 11 2 3 Temperature program Example 3 E Allowable temperature settings and ranges for temperature programs Fig 11 2 4 50 C Item Set Range Control Range Default value Up to 200 C 0 40 C min Heating z 0 250 __ 115V model ed C min een Up to 450 C 0 7 C min Up to200 C 0 70 C min Program rate Heating gt 0 250 Po T 230V model a C min ll Up to 450 C 0 30 C min P 250 0 Differ from the room Cooling a temperature or the C min oven temperature
32. 1032 AUX4 sensor is error Yes 1033 AUX5 sensor is error Yes When one of these messages appears the temperature sensor may have failed The sensor cannot be used in this condition and replacement or repair is required Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Unstable temperature with CRG Code Message CS 1034 COL CRG cannot be controlled Yes This message appears when cooling is impossible because of insufficient coolant etc If there is no coolant turn off the system replace the coolant and then restart the system This message may appear when cooling is impossible because the oven door is open In this case close the door and press Reset Error GC 2014 3 gt 287 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages Overheat Code Message cs 1036 Overheat is sensed Yes 1037 COL temp controller broken No 1038 INJ1 temp controller broken No 1039 DET1 temp controller broken No 1040 INJ2 temp controller broken No 1041 DET2 temp controller broken No 1042 AUX3 temp controller broken No 1043 AUX4 temp controller broken No 1044 AUX5 temp controller broken No An error may have occurred in the temperature control circuit Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Relay heater control circuit errors Code Message CS 1045 COL relay error No 1046 INJ1 DET2 relay error No 1047 AUX3 A
33. 2071 APC3 valve leaks Yes 2072 APC4 valve leaks Yes 2073 APC5 valve leaks Yes 2074 APC6 valve leaks Yes 2075 APC7 valve leaks Yes 2076 APC8 valve leaks Yes 2077 APC9 valve leaks Yes 2078 APC10 valve leaks Yes 2079 APC11 valve leaks Yes 2080 APC12 valve leaks Yes 2081 APC13 valve leaks Yes 2082 APC14 valve leaks Yes 2083 APC15 valve leaks Yes 2084 APC16 valve leaks Yes 2085 APC17 valve leaks Yes 2086 APC18 valve leaks Yes Gas is flowing even if the pressure is set at O kPa or the flow rate is set at O ml min If there is no problem with the gas supply an AFC APC value error may have occurred Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative 290 GC 2014 Abnormal component operation 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages Verify whether gas is supplied stably at the required pressure If there is no problem with the gas supply the control system such as the APC may have failed Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Code Message CS 2091 CAR1 purge is out of control Yes 2092 CAR2 purge is out of control Yes 2093 CAR3 purge is out of control Yes 2100 DetAPC1 makeup gas is out of ctrl Yes 2101 DetAPC1 hydrogen is out of control Yes 2102 DetAPC1 air is out of control Yes 2103 DetAPC2 makeup gas is out of ctrl Yes 2104 DetAPC2 hydrogen is out of control Yes 2105 DetAPC2 air is o
34. 214 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 6 Creating a new time schedule Select New PF menu from the time schedule screen to display the Time Schedule screen shown in Fig 16 1 5 Set an item using the A and V keys and ENTER key When Finish PF menu appears after you have set items press Finish to validate the schedule In the upper half of the screen the contents of the set schedule are displayed In the lower half of the screen the schedule edit screen is displayed Up to 100 lines are available per schedule The schedule execution time range is from 00 00 to 23 59 The unit is 1 minute 16 1 7 PF menu Inactive schedule Ho Time Function Value 1 05 00 Start GC GC Start Stop Pla Stop GC Fig 16 1 5 Creating a new schedule PF menu Description Reference section Finish Validates the time schedule Prev Page Returns to previous setup screen ne Next Page Moves to next item 9 The cursor can also be moved to next item by pressing ENTER key Cancel Cancels the time schedule currently being created GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 8 Parameters available in the time scheduler Parameter Description Specifies the number of times the program can execute before Time the schedule stops or switches to another file If greater than 2 scheduler The choices are Continuous or Pause at each run
35. 450 C 7 C min 350 C _ 15 C min 200 C 40 C min Example of column oven temperature increase decrease curve 115V model GC 2014 117 180 60 2014 eee 3 gt 12 Injection Port 1 2 1 Packed Column Injection Port Dual INJ During analysis using packed columns a sample is injected into an injection port and the entire evaporated sample is injected to the columns A mass flow controller is used to control the column flow rate so gas is supplied at a specified flow rate even when the column flow path resistance and temperature change The GC 2014 packed model has an injection port that two packed columns can be attached to dual INJ as standard An injection port that only one column is attached to single INJ is available as an option For the single INJ refer to its instruction manual Dual AFC Dual INJ Packed column Fig 12 1 1 Dual column packed analysis GC 2014 119 12 Injection Port 12 1 Packed Column Injection Port Dual INJ 12 1 1 Setting the temperature with INJ key 12 1 1 1 Screen description Press the INJ key to display the main screen shown in Fig 12 1 2 and to set the temperature of the injection port Injection Fort CARS READY dE a FILE ACTUAL SETTING Temp E 150 0 Print Next Inj sf Fig 12 1 2 INJ key main screen 120 GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 1 Packed Column Injection Port Dual INJ 12 1 1 2 Parameter list TEMP Range 0
36. CRG screens in this order AUX APC Frege kPa Presa kPa Press kPa On Off Fig 15 3 1 AUX APC main screen GC 2014 205 15 Optional Devices 15 3 Setting the AUX APC Parameters 15 3 2 Parameter list PRESS Range 0 0 400 0 kPa Default 100 kPa Set the pressure when the control mode is set to PRESS GAS TYPE Selection He N2 H2 Ar Default He Set the type of gas supplied to the APC If the gas type is set incorrectly the flow rate can not be set as specified in FLOW mode This is because a restrictor is used to calculate the flow rate 15 3 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Offset Performs offset calibration of APC sensor to improve the reproducibility of 3 6 results Next Toggles among AOC parameters gt AUX APC CRG screens in that order On Off Set APC to be used to Or Default value is On er 206 GC 2014 3 15 Optional Devices 1 5 4 Setting the AUX AMC Parameters Flow rate and gas type can be set for the AUX AMC 15 4 1 Screen description When the DAFC unit on other configurations is set to AMC LR and or the optional AUX AMC is installed press the OPTION key to display the screen shown in Fig 15 4 1 If a dif ferent screen appears press the OPTION key again or NEXT PF menu to display the correct screen The screen toggles among AOC parameters AUX temperature gt AUX APC A
37. Direct Operation S GC Configuration Service Maintenance E Stop Watch E Lock Select function Fig 16 10 1 ROM version No screen 16 10 2 Parameter list VERSION BUILD NO The ROM version may be required during system maintenance GC 2014 269 20 GC 2014 eee 171 van 29 17 Printing ng 17 1 1 Connection to Chromatopac Connect the gas chromatograph to the Chromatopac then press Print PF menu from the GC screen to print to the Chromatopac For the GC and Chromatopac connection refer to 2 4 Connecting a RS 232C Cable to the Chromatopac C R8A 17 1 2 Parameters to be printed 17 1 2 1 Program The current file program can be printed This includes the following screens temperature program COL INJ1 INJ2 pressure program CAR1 CAR2 CAR3 flow rate program CAR1 CAR2 CAR3 and split ratio program CAR1 CAR2 Press Print PF menu from any screen to print the same parameters for a saved pro gram COLUMN OVEN TEMP PROGRAM RATE TEMP TIME G see 100 0 1 6 00 2200 2 INJ1 TEMP PROGRAM 1 00 5 00 RATE TEMP TIME G es 25 0 INJ1 PRESSURE PROGRAM 0 00 RATE TEMP TIME DO e 100 0 0 00 INJ1 SPRIT RATIO TIME RATE Or em 1 0 END Fig 17 1 1 GC 2014 271 272 17 Printing 17 1 Printing 17 1 2 2 17 1 2 3 GC 2014 AOC parameters The current files AOC parameters and the parameters of AOC settings can b
38. E AN Top pressure meter lt NE E lt Hydrogen Top JN J pressure meter Hydrogen pressure meter Bottom Air pressure meter Bottom Back Se a Back vA ae E op 2 ir te Makeup gas gt pressive eter pressure regulator 0000 A i 0000 Hyd Back gf e LS Fa Z Front lydrogen pressure regulator Hydrogen pressure regulator Air pressure regulator Front Air pressure regulator a Dual FID b Single FID Fig 13 1 3 Manual flow controller for FID 3 When the optional solenoid valve to shut off supply gas P N 221 70782 91 is installed hydrogen and air are shut off by the valve until ignition To adjust the pressure press the VLV On key on the DET key main screen to open the solenoid valve 4 Turn the pressure regulators to set the pressure as described below Hydrogen 55 kPa Approx 40 ml min Air 40 kPa Approx 400 ml min Makeup gas nitrogen 75 kPa Approx 30 ml min Makeup gas helium 80 kPa Approx 30 ml min NOTE Pressure flow rate calibration curves for each flow controller are shown in Fig 13 1 4 These curves slightly differ according to units GC 2014 157 13 Detector 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID ml min 100 I lt a 9 8 3 50 3 a 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 KPa Hydrogen pressure a Hydrogen ml m
39. FLOW lights 70 FLOW OFF TIME 80 Flow Rate 122 Flow rate program 137 flow signal 243 FUNC key 67 68 211 Fuse 6 G GAS CONTROL 176 gas filter 13 Gas saver 134 GC CONFIGURATION 235 GC OPERATION LOG 182 H Heating energy generation 5 Help 77 HELP key 67 68 77 HETP 150 High Pressure Injection 143 Hydrogen flame ionization detector 153 hydrogen gas 10 l INITIALIZATION 261 INJ key 68 INLET PRESS 92 129 147 Inlet pressures 122 INSTALLATION PIPING 258 INSTALLATION POSITION 256 isothermal analysis 115 K Key locking 265 L LANGUAGE 253 LCD USE TIME 175 leaks 15 LINEAR VELOCITY 92 129 147 link device code 250 Load 95 LONGEST PROGRAM TIME 105 GC 2014 M Maint INJ 81 MAKE UP 160 MONIT key 67 68 103 monitor injection screen 109 Monitoring the Flow Rate 107 Monitoring the Temperature 106 N A 180 N I 180 N S 180 N T 180 O Offset 123 132 148 160 OPTION key 68 Optional Devices 195 Oven Temperature 113 OVER TEMP PROTECTION 176 Parameter locking 266 Parameter log 185 PARITY 238 password 267 Peak Genarator 194 PF key 67 68 72 PF menu 72 power cable 4 Power consumption 262 power supply 4 Pre Run program 231 Pressure program 135 PRESSURE UNIT 253 PRIMARY PRESS 175 253 primary pressure 253 Printing 271 Programmed analysis 115 PROTOCOL 238 PURGE FLOW RATE 93 purge flow rate 148 R RAM 176 Ready Check 239 REAL TIME CLOCK REGISTOR 175 REMAIN TIME 105 RESET IC 176 177 RESTART GC 80 RETENTIO
40. For an NUMBER stop AOC select Continuous When Pause at each run is Stop OF chosen the program executes at set intervals continuously at TIMES set intervals OF RUN If another program such as a temperature program is running Schedule when time schedule execution time expires priority is given to 0 9 Load the running program When the current program finishes the time schedule stops or file is changed to another file GC Start Stop Sets start stop of gas chromatograph 16 1 9 Changing schedule parameters To change the contents of an existing time schedule move the cursor using the A and V keys to select the schedule to be changed and press the ENTER key To change the time When the Time Schedule select screen appears enter new numeric values and press Finish PF menu if you would like to change only the time To change the parameters Move the cursor change the parameter and then press Finish PF menu to complete the change To cancel any changes If you have changed the schedule but would like to return to the former schedule press Cancel PF menu before pressing Finish PF menu The schedule returns to its former status GC 2014 3 gt 215 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 10 Time schedule example Example 7 00 System starts 19 00 System stops First program Screen display 1 Time 7 00 Edit program Time hh mm
41. Replace the igniter When the optional solenoid valve to shut off supply gas is installed or ignition is carried out immediately after opening the gas cylinder s main valve the message retried or ignition failed may be displayed because hydrogen in the piping is not completely replaced 13 1 5 3 Distinguishing the FID E Manual flow controller Distinguish the FID flame by closing the main valve of the hydrogen cylinder to shut off gas supply E When the manual flow controller and the solenoid valve to shut off supply gas are installed E APC Press Stop GC PF menu on the SYSTEM key main screen The solenoid valves close when the detector control ends to shut off gas supply distinguishing the FID flame Press Stop GC PF menu on the SYSTEM key main screen APC control ends when the detector control ends to shut off gas supply distinguishing the FID flame To distinguish the flame before the GC stops press the DET key select DET Gas PF menu and set the control of hydrogen and air to Off on the screen Gas supply is shut off extinguishing the FID flame GC 2014 gt 163 3 13 Detector 1 3 2 Thermal Conductivity Detector TCD 164 13 2 1 Principle of TCD operation The thermal conductivity detector TCD can detect all compounds except the carrier gas itself The metallic TCD filament is heated by the application of current The carrier gas used has a high thermal conductivity such as he
42. Temp tt 300 4 signal Polarity E Current m 38 Filter Time Constant ig Signal Output Port Chi Background sig save Off Background sig comp _ ort Det sig subtraction off Signal Attenuation xl Analog Signal Type Wide A O PA 56 GC 2014 NOTE TCD signals do not necessarily have a plus peak because they are determined by relationship of heat conduction between a substance to be analyzed and carrier gas However the data processing unit normally calculates the area of a plus peak When a minus peak is detected signal polarity needs to be inverted into a plus peak Signal polarity can be changed using the time program during analysis For detailed descriptions about setting the time program refer to 16 3 Time Program gs eee Gc 2014 87 58 29 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 5 Single DET To perform capillary analysis using a unit with the single DET single FID ECD FPD and capillary FTD makeup gas is used as described below Install the detector adopter to the detector joint then install a column Detector adopter comes with all single DET units listed above Single FID ECD and capillary FTD A makeup gas flow controller comes with them FPD Makeup gas is unnecessary Single DET Hydrogen Flow controller Makeup gas Detector adopter Fig 4 5 1 Single DET In case of FID GC 2014 4 Insta
43. This constant affects the processing of the detector signal As the time constant increases noise as well as the peak height are reduced Select the optimum value in accordance with the peak half width Refer to 13 3 Filter Signal Time Constant SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT Selection Off Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Default Channel is automatically assigned Select the digital and analog signals output Channels Four channels are available However for analog output only Ch1 and Ch2 are available as standard BACKGROUND SIG SAVE Selection Off Buff 1 Buff 2 Default Off Background baseline signals can be saved for the purpose of background subtraction BACKGROUND SIG COMP Selection Off Buff 1 Buff 2 Default Off Subtracts the saved background signal baseline from the actual baseline This pro duces a stable baseline despite considerable baseline fluctuations DET SIG SUBTRACTION Selection Off DET 1 DET 2 DET 3 DET 4 Default Off Subtracts the detector signal of one detector from the signal of another detector For the details on background save and background compensation refer to 13 4 Background Compensation SIGNAL RANGE Selection x1 x10 1 x10 2 x10 3 x10 Default x10 1 Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient 10 for a linear analog signal type If the data processing unit is saturated for example change the setting from x1 to x10 1 from x10 2 to x10 3 In case of the digital signal the sign
44. on the back of the GC Fig 2 2 1 Using this cable analog signals can be outputted and the Chromatopac can be started when the GC starts Refer to 16 6 9 Setting the link device code e Back of the GC OPT LINKSTART OUT READY IN START IN READY OUT AA RS 2320 Capd Mme aaron UNIECIOR1 INJECIORZ SAMPLER ANALOG OUT 1 Ch1 ANALOG OUT 2 Ch2 j AOC built in power source Fig 2 2 1 Connecting the Chromatopac signal cable GC 2014 E Setting analog signal output L Set a line 2 Before Use 2 2 Outputting Analog Signals to the Chromatopac NOTE 1 Press the SET key then press the PF2 key Line Config 2 Specify an injection port and detector to which a column is connected in the same line The screen on the right shows an example where a column is connected to the dual INJ and dual FID Without specifying a detector in a line the screen to set analog signal output below does not appear 2 Set analog signal output 1 Press the DET key 2 The outlined part is a parameter for analog signal output for all detectors Set the parameter following the description below For Background signal save compensation and Detector signal subtraction refer to Chapter 13 Detector DET Signa
45. z 4 AFC and APC Offset Calibration The pressure and flow rate sensors of AFC and APC may become slightly off after long periods of use If the sensor values deviate 0 5 kPa or 0 5 ml min is indicated for pressure or flow rate instead of zero even when there is no gas flowing In this case perform the offset zero point calibration Calibration is especially effective when data reproducibility is important Calibration procedures are as follows 1 Set the temperatures of the injection port column oven and detector low and wait until they become 40 C or lower AFC calibration is performed when there is no gas flowing Stopping gas when parts temperatures are high may cause deterioration of columns 2 Press the SYSTEM key select Start Seq PF menu and check the mode to start the GC when the power is turned on If it is not set to Manual Start change it 3 Turn off the power and reboot it Rebooting leaves the unit at the state of SYSTEM OFF Do not shut off gas supply by turning off the main valve or by any other measures Performing calibration without primary pressure makes the zero point off 4 To perform AFC calibration completely empty out the gas by detaching the septum of the injection port To perform APC calibration wait until when the pressure or flow rate does not fluctuate 5 Press the toggle key on each flow controller s parameter setup screen until the Offset P
46. 0 400 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the temperature of the injection port Keep the injection port temperature as low as is practical to increase the service life of the temperature sensor In order to instantly vaporize samples inside the injection port set the injection port temperature approximately 30 C above the column oven temperature final temp Due to the minute quantity of sample injected the sample vaporizes at temperatures lower than the boiling point of sample elements To set the injection port maximum temperature limit refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits in 16 6 GC Configuration 12 1 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reteioncs section Print Prints the injection port temperature on Chromatopac y Toggles among the setup screeens if two or more injection ports are Next Inj installed in this system 2 The INJ key can also be used to switch screens GC 2014 3 gt 121 122 12 Injection Port 12 1 Packed Column Injection Port Dual INJ 12 1 2 Setting the Flow Rate 12 1 2 1 Screen description Press the FLOW key to display the screen shown in Fig 12 1 3 and to set parameters for the dual AFC Advanced Flow Controller that controls carrier gas flow rate Control Hode 4 Dual AMM MN Flow rate of the column L Inlet Prstkra ue connected to the left inlet L Col flow Hn MERE 50 8 L Carrier gas type He a 100000000 Flow rate
47. 05 16 14 28 E0011 CAR1 AFC PCB error 7 00 Fig 17 1 6 274 GC 2014 29 17 Printing 1 2 AOC commands When you press Print from the AOC all items are printed as command names The list below shows correspondence of command names to item names The setup values such as Fast and Yes No are printed as numbers Correspondence of setup values to numbers is shown in the range and default columns in the list below E Command list command Item Range Default name WRPT Sample Wash 0 99 2 WMOD Solvent Wash 0 99 1 REPT Number of Injection 1 99 1 IVOL Sample Size 0 1 8 0 1 0 WPRS Pre solvent Wash 0 99 0 PUMP Pumping 0 99 5 WTPP Viscosity 0 0 99 9 0 2 WAIT Dwell Time 0 0 99 9 0 ISPD Inj Speed Plunger Slow 0 Fast 2 Fast 2 SSPD Inj Speed Syringe Slow 0 Fast 1 Fast 1 SAND Inj Mode 0 4 0 SOLV Solvent selection eee 4 All 0 SINT Priority Sample No 1 0 SSNO are aie No Only this sample is 4 0 SNO2 Injected sample No for sub AOC 1 0 AAIR Air Aspiration No 0 Yes 1 No 0 USPD Plunger Aspiration Speed Slow 0 Middle 1 Fast 2 Fast 2 DSPD Speed of Plunger Slow 0 Middle 1 Fast 2 Fast 2 HIGH Syringe Height 1 0 20 0 LOWS Syringe Height eee 0 INJH Syringe Height Inj 0 22 0 STRI Multi Inj 1 99 1 ESAM ena i No Samples after that are not 4 0 WKEY ee e before injection in O 1 0
48. 104 Analog Signal Type Set a signal type according to the type of Chromatopac to be connected If this is set incorrectly data cannot be processed correctly Wide C R8A C R7A C R7Aplus Linear Chromatopacs other than C R8A C R7A C R7Aplus E Calibration of analog wide range signal NOTE When the GC is connected to the Chromatopac C R8A C R7A C R7Aplus with a chromatopac signal cable and the analog signal type described above is set to Wide calibration is necessary in order to match the zero level of the GC and Chromatopac Perform calibration in the following cases When the GC and Chromatopac are connected for the first time during installation When the GC or Chromatopac is changed with other instrument When a connection channel number is changed by switching a connector on the GC side When a two channel board is installed on the Chromatopac and a connection channel number is changed by switching a connector on the Chromatopac side Calibration is not necessary when a detector is changed e g when signal to be outputted to Ch1 is changed from TCD to FID The following is calibration procedures 1 Press the DET key on the GC to turn OFF the detector control 2 Load the BASIC calibration program C R7A C R7Aplus Type LOAD ZCALIB on the Win3 key screen C R8A Type LOAD 8 ZCALIB BAS when key input is possible 3 Press the RUN key of
49. 2030 APC5 leaks Yes 2031 APC6 leaks Yes 2032 APC7 leaks Yes 2033 APC8 leaks Yes 2034 APC9 leaks Yes 2035 APC10 leaks Yes 2036 APC11 leaks Yes 2037 APC12 leaks Yes 2038 APC13 leaks Yes 2039 APC 14 leaks Yes 2040 APC15 leaks Yes 2041 APC16 leaks Yes 2042 APC17 leaks Yes 2043 APC18 leaks Yes The pressure cannot reach the set value Check whether gas is supplied and whether gas is leaking from connections NOTE Gas may be leaking in locations other than the ones displayed If the purge flow rate is too low because of the leakage of carrier gas line the message Example Purge leaks appears in stead of the indication of ESC or TFC leakage GC 2014 3 gt 289 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages Valve leak errors Code Message CS 2048 CAR1 purge valve leaks Yes 2049 CAR2 purge valve leaks Yes 2050 CAR3 purge valve leaks Yes 2057 DetAPC1 makeup valve leaks Yes 2058 DetAPC1 hydrogen valve leaks Yes 2059 DetAPC1 air valve leaks Yes 2060 DetAPC2 makeup valve leaks Yes 2061 DetAPC2 hydrogen valve leaks Yes 2062 DetAPC2 air valve leaks Yes 2063 DetAPC3 makeup valve leaks Yes 2064 DetAPC3 hydrogen valve leaks Yes 2065 DetAPC3 air valve leaks Yes 2066 DetAPC4 makeup valve leaks Yes 2067 DetAPC4 hydrogen valve leaks Yes 2068 DetAPC4 air valve leaks Yes 2069 APC1 valve leaks Yes 2070 APC2 valve leaks Yes
50. 20i s User s Manual 300 GC 2014 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages gt 18 1 9 Warning messages Code Message CS 9000 COL CRG use time is over Yes 9001 INJ2 CRG use time is over Yes 9002 Fan use time is over Yes 9004 CAR1 septum counter is over No 9005 CAR2 septum counter is over No 9006 CAR3 septum counter is over No 9007 CAR1 insert counter is over No 9008 CAR2 insert counter is over No 9009 CAR3 insert counter is over No These messages appear when the time or the count exceeds the set value Replace the subject component and reset the count on the menu of the DIAG key screen Code 9002 warning requires component replacement and counter reset by a serviceperson Contact your Shimadzu representative Code Message CS 9010 System is not ready No This message appears when the system was started before it was ready Normally do not start analysis until the system is ready If this message appears when all the parameters including temperature and flow rate are ready check the ready setting for unused components and check the equilibration time Code Message CS 9011 Ignition finished retried No This message appears when ignition sequence was re attempted because the ignition failed This does not stop the execution of analysis If this message appears frequently check DETECTOR IGNITE and DETECTOR IGNITION by the standard di
51. 25 2 Before Use 2 4 Connecting a RS 232C Cable to the Chromatopac C R8A E Setting transmission parameters Set transmission parameters when performing digital transmission between the GC and Chromatopac for the first time This is not required for each operation e vel transmission parameters tor the I Set transmission parameters for the GC 1 Select 8 GC CONFIGURATION on ranemission Parameter the FUNC key screen and then select Protocol 4b_ LEVELZ 3 TRANSMISSION PARAMETER Baud Rate bps 960 2 Set transmission parameters Stop Bit ibit Protocol LEVEL2 Baud rate bps 9600 Stop bit 1bit Parity EVEN 3 Press the PF2 key Apply Farity EVEN NOTE Turning ON the power of the GC is not necessary 2 Set transmission parameters for the C R8A 1 Press the CONFIG key and then press the T key T TRS 2 Press the key until the STD2 Port RS 232C Setup screen appears PORT MODE No BPS STD2 12917 18 9600 3 Set transmission parameters MODE 12917 Protocol LEVEL2 Stop bit 1bit Parity EVEN No 8 logical port number BPS 9600 baud rate 4 After completing setting press the EXIT key and then press the Y key to save the settings 5 After changing transmission parameters reboot the C R8A to enable the new settings E Procedures to start digital transmission After setting transmission parameters start di
52. 29 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines a 3 Capillary Analysis Using the Dual FID When a makeup gas flow controller is used To perform capillary analysis using a unit with the dual FID makeup gas needs to be supplied to the FID that a column is connected to In order to supply makeup gas the optional makeup gas flow controller P N 221 70877 91 1 flow path 221 70877 92 2 flow paths are used Prior to installing a column install the detector adopter P N 221 33193 91 to the detector s joint Although an adopter and column are connected to the right R side of the dual FID in the figure below they can be connected to either side L R Dual FID Detector adopter L Dual e Fig 4 3 1 Dual FID flow controller GC 2014 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 4 3 Capillary Analysis Using the Dual FID When a makeup gas flow controller is used 3 gt E Setting analytical flow lines Setting analytical flow lines is described below For procedures to install an adopter and columns and input analytical conditions refer to the operation manual Seta line 1 Press the SET key and then press the PF2 key Line Config 2 Set the SPL and dual FID DFID on a same line LINE1 is specified in the example below Lines 1 through 4 can be selected Line Configuration mn Mi MN A
53. 3 Time Program 16 3 3 Creating a new time program Select New PF menu from the time program screen to display the time program edit screen shown in Fig 16 3 2 Set an item using the A and V keys and the ENTER key When Finish PF menu becomes available and the items have been set press Finish to validate the program At the top of the screen the contents of the set program are displayed At the bottom of the screen the program edit screen is displayed Up to 100 lines are available for one program The possible program execution time ranges from 0 00 to 9999 00 minutes ime Program EME FILE FILE GC analysis Time min 5 00 Time min Function Value 1 1 046 FID Range 107 2 5 64 FIDL zero d Edit program Relay Detector A Flow controller Cancel Fig 16 3 2 Time program edit screen 16 3 4 PF menu PF menu Description apie Finish Validates the time program Prev Page Returns to previous setup screen Next Page Moves to next item ss Cancel Cancels the time program being created E GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 3 Time Program 16 3 5 Time Program parameters Parameter Description Relay NOTE 1 Sets range or attenuation for the detector configured in the Range E analytical line Changes the polarity between and for TCD configured in the Polarity i
54. 7 3 Set 0 when a unit is not installed Set 15 when a unit is installed in a position not shown in Fig 16 7 3 T r Fig 16 7 3 Component installation location Changes are not in effect until the GC has been turned off and on AAA Gc 2014 ey 257 258 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance 16 7 4 1 Screen description 16 7 4 INSTALLATION PIPING Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen and then select 2 INSTALLATION PIPING to open the Installation Piping Screen shown in Fig 16 7 4 In the carrier gas flow controller fields specify where the flow controller injection port tubing is connected In the detector gas flow controller fields specify the detector configuration including detector type and flow control unit Installation Piping CARL TTT Unit Type AFC PT Slot No SLOTZ Heater Port 4 INJ A care MU Carrier gas Unit Type DAFC flow controller lt Slot Ho SLOTS settings Heater Port INJ CARS MU Unit Type Slot Ho gt Heater Port HOH A 100000000 Tnstallation Pipi IA Cont Type DET APC Ho DET APC No Unit Type Slot No slot No Heater Fort Heater Fort ITE Cont Type DET APC Ho Unit Type 4 TCD L DETI DETS HON Detector gas flow controller settings Fig 16 7 4 16 7 4 2 Parameter list E Carrier gas f
55. 9 1 1 In the upper portion of the main screen monitor the status of the injection port the column and the detectors configured in each line In the lower portion of the screen monitor the chromatogram the temperature program etc Select Temp Mon and Flow Mon PF menu to monitor the temperature the pressure and the flow rate of all injection ports columns and detectors configured in all configured lines Monitor Main The detector range setup value temperature and the The injection port temperature inlet pressure and purge flow rate are displayed voltage are displayed This value multiplied by the range attenuation coefficient is output as the analog signal The column oven temperature is displayed The chromatogram is dis played al Fetention Time e e Pence Batten Temp Mon Flow Mon Zero Adj YI Fig 9 1 1 MONIT key main screen E Detector status The ignition status of an FID or FPD detector can be confirmed on the Monitor Screen For a FID Dual Single Single L Flame On Flame Off Fig 9 1 2 GC 2014 103 104 9 Monitoring the GC 9 1 MONIT key Main Screen E Changing the monitor magnification zoom The chromatogram and the temperature or pressure flow rate program is displayed on the lower portion of the Monitor Screen The signal axis and the time axis are displayed If there is a tempe
56. AA AA A th ee ein ae 296 18 1 7 Operations errors occ Pale deeb yas ee eel Meh Obes te ee dels 297 18 1 8 Optional device error AOC 20i S 0 0 2 teeta 300 18 1 9 Warming Messages dos tN Mall Hi Min ill Sh a ke ae ed ca 301 Index GC 2014 vii vii E 60204 A 2 1 Installation a 1 Verification of Installation Location E Installation location requirements Consider the following points to ensure safe and appropriate unit operation when selecting the installation site Ambient temperature and humidity For optimal performance operate this unit within the following temperature and humidity specifications Temperature range 18 C to 28 C Relative humidity range 50 to 60 Avoid use under conditions where con densation forms Operating temperature range 5 C to 40 C Operating humidity range 5 to 90 Avoid use under conditions where con densation forms 2 Installation location Install the unit on a firm stable and flat base The GC 2014ATF model weighs approximately 50 kg 3 Corrosive gas and dust Avoid exposure to corrosive gas and excessive dust to prolong the service life and maintain optimal unit performance 4 Electro magnetic fields and power supply noise This unit should not be used near strong electro magnetic fields The power supply must have little or no noise These items can cause instrument problems 5 Other precautions For optimal performance avoid the following conditions during inst
57. AFC 1 Press the FLOW key 2 Set Control mode to Dual low CARE tf Control Mode gt Dual NN Leet TE L Inlet PratkPa EN L Col lowie a E L Carrier gas bype j Nz MM Fi IA Inlet PratkPa y R Col flow te ag 50 0 R Carrier gas type Hz GC 2014 3 Set the dual FID 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 3 2 Dual Column Packed FID Analysis 1 Press the DET key 2 Set Control mode to Dual 3 Set Signal polarity as described below The FID L FID R signal is outputted When a sample is injected into the dual INJ L The FID R FID L signal is outputted When a sample is injected into the dual INJ R lete r DET HZ AD ia g4 n Temp tt 150 4 Flame On Signal Polarity _ Filter Time Constant ig Control Mode Dual signal Output Port Chi Background sig save _ ort Background sig comp _ Ort Det sig subtraction Off signal Range xia Analog Signal Type Linear GC 2014 3 gt 35 29 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines z 3 Single Column Packed FID Analysis Connecting either of the left L sides or right R sides of the dual INJ and dual FID with a column allows for analysis with the single column configuration Single column configuration is used in following cases 1 Background compensation is unnecessa
58. BACKGROUND SIG SAVE Off BACKGROUND SIG COMP Buff 1 or Buff 2 Inject a sample and execute analysis A signal after subtracting the background is outputted 3 13 Detector ground Compensation letector DET 1 AD _On Temp Lt JM 150 0 Flame Or Filter Time Constant mz Sl nal Output Port Chi Background sig save lt pEuffl Background sig comp Ott Det sig subtraction oft Signal Attenuation ae Analog Signal Type letector DET 1 EAD _On Temp Lt 50 OMS Flame Or Filter Time Constant mz Sl nal Output Port Chi Background sig save Off Background sig comp 4bBuffl Det sig subtraction oft Signal Attenuation ae Analog Signal Type Wide GC 2014 171 CHROMATOPAC C R7A CH REPORT No 21 207b 2 SUMPLI CO3 93 10 15 10 40 44 Fig 13 4 1 Example of programmed analysis without compensation CHROMATOPAC C R7A CH REPORT No 27 7ovh 2 SUMPLI CO3 93 10 15 10 40 44 Fig 13 4 2 Example of programmed analysis with compensation 1220 GC 2014 eee 29 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis Each part of the gas chromatograph is checked for problems with the self diagnosis function Perform the standard diagnosis periodicaslly to maintain optimal performance and prevent failures 14 1 1 Screen description Select STANDARD DIAGNOSIS from the DIAG key main screen to display the Standard Diagnosis screen shown in Fi
59. COMP 155 167 BACKGROUND SIG SAVE 155 167 batch schedule 219 BAUD RATE 238 BEEP 253 CARRIER GAS TYPE 131 148 CE key 67 68 Changing item names 75 Checking 15 Chng Graph 105 chromatogram 103 CLEAN UP 80 Clean up 82 Clear key 68 COL key 68 113 COLUMN FLOW RATE 92 122 129 147 Column inner diameter 1 D 133 COLUMN LENGTH 133 COLUMN OVEN 92 114 Computer for Insert 188 Computer for Septum 188 CONTROL MODE 93 122 130 148 Coolant Consumption Counter 190 COUNTER FOR INSERT 175 COUNTER FOR SEPTUM 175 CPU 176 CPU REGISTOR 175 CRG 190 207 CRG USE TIME 175 CURRENT 166 CURRENT FILE 80 cursor 73 Cursor key 68 Cursor keys 67 D DATE 236 day 212 DC VOLTAGE 175 DET key 68 154 165 DET SIG SUBTRACTION 155 167 DETECTOR 80 DETECTOR ADC REGISTER 175 DETECTOR CONTROLLER 154 165 Detector Gas 157 159 DETECTOR HV SOURCE 175 DETECTOR IGNITE 176 DETECTOR IGNITION 176 DETECTOR ROM 175 detector signals 242 DETECTOR TEMP 93 DIAG key 67 68 173 Diagnostic log 187 DRIFT 240 drying out 6 dual AFC 122 Dual FID 154 ECD FREQUENCY 176 ENTER 67 ENTER key 68 Entering numeric values 74 EQUILIBRATION TIME 114 Error log 186 Event No 279 Fan Off 114 Fan On 114 FAN USE TIME 175 FID 153 File 95 file copy 96 file initialization 97 FILE LOAD 87 FILM THICKNESS 124 133 FILTER TIME CONSTANT 155 167 170 FLOW CONTROL 80 FLOW key 68 129 GC 2014 303 304 Index F O FLOW lamp 67
60. LINE1 is specified in the example below Lines 1 through 4 can be selected Line Configuration njector 100000004 SFL NE Detector 100000 DFID DTCD DUO tion TM 80C1 0CE Sl IE IN NOTE If the dual AFC is specified for AMC LR the indication of DINJ disappears 50 GC 2014 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 4 2 Capillary Analysis Using the Dual FID When a detector adopter with purge is used 3 Set the makeup gas flow rate 1 Press the OPTION key 2 Set AMC L when the detector adopter is connected to the left L side of the dual INJ and set AMC R when it is connected to the right R side Start control and set the makeup gas flow rate and gas type 4 Set the dual FID Press kPa PENE Flow MA 30 0 Ha On Preaa kPa Flow 3a 30 4 He On Off 1 Press the DET key 2 Set Control mode as described below Set to Single L when the column is connected to the left L side of the dual FID and Single Detector DET 2 AD on Temp tt Pw 150 8 Flame On Filter Time Constant 2 ms Control Mode d single E Signal Output Port Chi Background sig save _ oft Background sig comp _ Ort Det sig subtraction Off signal Attenuation x1 Analog Signal Type Wide R when it is connected to the right R side GC 2014 gt 51 52
61. Next Runs the selected schedule on the following day If mode is set to day the schedule for the next day is executed Stop Stops the current schedule This item is displayed when a time schedule is running GC 2014 gt 217 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 13 Copying and deleting a time schedule Select 4 COPY or 5 DELETE from the time scheduler menu screen to display the time schedule copy screen or the time schedule delete screen shown in Fig 16 1 8 or Fig 16 1 9 To copy specify the copy source schedule and the copy destination schedule then press Copy PF menu To delete specify a schedule number to be deleted then press Delete PF menu NOTE A currently running schedule cannot be copied or deleted Active schedule Ho t schedule Ho 4 Copy Delete Sra Ho schedule Number 4 Ho 4 Det de Ho 3 schedule has been copied schedule has been cleared w Return Delete Fig 16 1 8 Schedule copy screen Fig 16 1 9 Schedule delete screen 218 GC 2014 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 2 Batch Schedule Use the batch schedule to continuously and automatically perform analyses A batch is useful for switching methods automatically during the analyses 16 2 1 Screen description Select 2 BATCH from the FUNC key screen the Batch screen shown in Fig 16 2 1 appears Function Time Scheduler E Batc
62. ON ll svars SS a dl reor our 15 Q o A SMAPLER auto sampler o AOC RS 232C cable Q En AOC power cable lt INJECTOR 1 auto injector i sae built in power source Fig 2 5 1 Connection of the AOC 20 series Connect the cable to the AOC connector and RS 232C connector on the AOC built in power source GC 2014 27 28 2 Before Use 2 5 Connecting Auto Injector Auto Sampler AOC 20 Series E Setting AOC parameters 1 Set a line 1 Press the SET key and then press the PF2 key Line Config 2 Specify AOC1 on the line with the injection port that the auto injector has been attached to 3 The GC and AOC built in power source will be automatically linked 2 Set AOC parameters NOTE 1 Press the OPTION key If other option screens appear press the OPTION key repeatedly until the AOC Parameter screen appears 2 Set AOC parameters Parameters will be transmitted to the AOC as soon as they are set For detailed information about setting AOC parameters refer to 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters or AOC 20 user s manual If the AOC Parameter screen is not displayed check the connection of RS 232C cable and settings for line configuration GC 2014 Line Configuration A o SPL DINJ MR TTT DFID DTCD tion TT A0C1 A0C2 E DL Oe gt i 1 MM 111111
63. PRG 6 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 7 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 8 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 9 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 10 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 11 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 12 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 13 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 44 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 15 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 16 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 51 Performs zero adjustment of DET 1 Frees zero adjustment of DET 1 52 Performs zer
64. Scheduler Use the Time scheduler to establish a weekly or daily schedule of automated GC operations 16 1 1 description Screen Select 1 TIME SCHEDULER from the FUNC key main screen to display the Time sched uler menu shown in Fig 16 1 1 Function Batch Time Program El Pre Rim Inactive schedule Ho ime Scheduler BS Direct Operation S GC Configuration Service Maintenance Start Stop El Copy Delete E Stop Watch E Lock Select function Fig 16 1 1 Time scheduler menu 16 1 2 Parameter list MODE Select whether the same schedule will be executed every day or a different schedule will be executed on each day of the week EDIT Edit the schedule START STOP Set the schedule start stop procedure COPY Copy the contents of a schedule to a specified schedule DELETE Delete the contents of a specified schedule GC 2014 211 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 3 Setting the mode Select 1 MODE from the time scheduler menu to display the mode setup screen shown in Fig 16 1 2 Select whether to use the same schedule every day or to use a different schedule on each day of the week Up to 8 schedules can be set with the time scheduler schedule Ho Hode 4bHumber The schedule number can Schedule Number Ho A be set only when in Number mode Fig 16 1 2 Mode setup screen NOTE When the
65. TIME a Final ratio SPLT ess 2 Split Ratio CARI Split ratio monitor Program total min Timetmin Split Ratio Init 50 3 Lat 5 OY 58 4 end 6 0d END Fig 12 2 13 Example of split ratio program 140 GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 3 gt 12 2 8 Septum purge Set the septum purge flow rate The septum purge removes contamination from the injection port at the septum The septum purge flow rate is set here 12 2 8 1 Screen description Select Purge PF menu from the FLOW key main screen to display the septum purge screen shown in Fig 12 5 13 Septum Furge CARI READY SPL Purge flow EE 3 0 Fig 12 2 14 Septum purge setup screen GC 2014 141 12 2 8 2 Parameter list FLOW RATE Range Refer to Fig 12 2 15 Default 3 0 ml min Sets the septum purge flow rate 300 Y 250 a oO 3 200 D amp 150 2 Setting range 3 5 100 50 0 a e j 23 0 100 200 300 400 500 Column inlet pressure kPa Fig 12 2 15 Available setting range for the purge flow rate 12 2 8 3 PF menu Reference PF menu Description section On Off Set to On when the septum purge flow rate is applied n 4209 GC 2014 eee 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 12 2 9 High pressure injection and splitter fix mode E High Pressure Injection High pressure inje
66. The column flow rate ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less and the calculated total flow rate is 1 200 ml min 3 The linear velocity ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less GC 2014 131 132 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 12 2 2 3 PF menu PF menu Description Rererence section Sets inner diameter length and film thickness of capillary column Values set here are used in column inlet pressure caluculations from Column column flow rate or linear velocity or vice versa 12 5 3 If these parameters are not set correctly calculations are not performed correctly Gas Saver The gas saver saves carrier gas by reducing the split flow rate 12 5 4 On Off Set the flow controller to be used to On When the GC starts the AFC in the current analytical line which is set to be On is controlled Press Prog Sets the column inlet pressure program 12 5 5 Flow Prog Sets the total flow rate program 12 5 6 Split Prog Sets the split ratio program 12 5 7 Purge Sets the septum purge flow rate 12 5 8 High Pressure Injection Sets high pressure injection where the column inlet pressure is kept at a Advanced high value for a certain period of time during injection 12 5 9 Splitter Fix Keeps the split flow rate constant Offset Performs offset calibration of the AFC sensor 3 6 This
67. about the event No refer to 17 4 Event No GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 4 Pre Run Program 16 4 6 Pre Run Program set up example Example Switches B contact of Event 91 four minutes in to the program 1 Time 4 0min 2 Relay v 3 Relay v 4 Switch point v 5 Event 91 92 6 Event 91 7 Point B v 8 Setting is completed Screen display Edit program Time min 4 00 Edit program An E Detector Flow controller Relay Ps lay AC On Off Relay HECuitch point On Off point Switch point a1 ae Evental 92 A fl vaz Eventel 4 gt Point E Time min Function Value 1 ad am Vat E GC 2014 gt 233 16 5 on 234 16 5 1 Screen description Select 5 DIRECT OPERATION from the FUNC key screen to display the screen shown in Fig 16 5 1 t Operation 3 16 Special Functions Input the event No and press the Execute key to execute the specified event For a description of the event No refer to 17 4 Event No Function Tine Scheduler Batch Time Program El Pre Rim 58 i S GC Configuration Service Maintenance E Stop Watch E Lock ect Operation Select function Event ofl Return Fig 16 5 1 Direct operation setup screen 16 5 2 Parameter list EVENT Range 500 500 Default Runs the operation assigned to the event No Refer
68. and decrease the total flow rate during analysis by making a flow rate program When you set a flow rate program for the APC a corresponding pressure program is actu ally calculated based on of the pressure flow rate calibration curve saved by the GC 12 2 6 1 Screen description Select Flow Prog PF menu from the FLOW key main screen while the control mode is set to FLOW to display the Carrier Flow screen shown in Fig 12 2 10 Carrier Flow CARI LIHE 1 Flow monitor ma Program total min A a8 Rate Ma Flow Time min Up to 7 ramps of flow rate increase decrease can be set Init __ 50 9 8 8 lat EHD inej Ine Line Fig 12 2 10 Flow rate program setup screen 12 2 6 2 Parameter list FLOW RATE Range 0 00 970 0 ml min Refer to Fig 12 2 5 Default 50 ml min Set the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the total flow rate program TIME Range 0 0 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Set the hold time for the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the flow rate program RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 ml min2 Default END Set the flow rate program rate If you set the rate to 0 END appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp If you move the cursor to END and set any numeric value other than 0 the pressure and the time for that ramp can be entered NOTE The control range of the flow rate program
69. are Next Inj installed in this system 2 The INJ key can also be used to switch screens GC 2014 12 2 2 Setting the flow rate with FLOW key 12 2 2 1 Screen description 12 Injection Port gt 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System Press the FLOW key to display the screen shown in Fig 12 2 4 and to set the AFC advanced flow controller parameters The AFC controls the pressure and the flow rate of the carrier gas Column Inlet prege kPa Column flow Ms Liner vel Me split ratio ee Total flow MENE 53 9 Split mode Control mode Carrier gas type Fig 12 2 4 12 2 2 2 Parameter list INLET PRESS FLOW key main screen Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to NOTE 1 Default 100 kPa Set the column inlet pressure This sets the initial temperature of a pressure program When the control mode is set to PRESS the system controls the column inlet pressure so that it remains constant during an oven temperature program COLUMN FLOW RATE Range Refer to NOTE 2 Default 1 00 ml min Sets the carrier gas flow rate at the capillary column outlet atmospheric pressure at 25 C When you set the carrier gas flow rate the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter and the length of the column and the film thickness of the column The column flow rate is set separately so that the carrier gas flow rate desired occures at the initial tempera
70. calibration contributes to good reproducibility of results i Toggles among the AFC set up screens if two or more AFCs are installed Next Flow in this system Pirana The FLOW key can also be used to switch screens GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 3 gt 12 2 3 Setting column parameters For capillary columns the column inner diameter length and film thickness are used to cal culate the column flow rate and linear velocity Enter the column inlet pressure and the col umn flow rate and linear velocity are calculated based on the column parameters Alternatively by entering the column flow rate and linear velocity valves the column param eters are used to calculate the corresponding column inlet pressure 12 2 3 1 Screen description Select Column PF menu from the FLOW key main screen to display the Column Diam screen shown in Fig 12 5 5 Colum Diam CARI Column i d mm 0 38 Column lensth m 25 0 Film thicknege um a 58 Fig 12 2 6 Column setup screen 12 2 3 2 Parameter list COLUMN I D Range 0 01 6 00 mm Default 0 32 mm COLUMN LENGTH Range 0 1 250 0 m Default 25 0 m FILM THICKNESS Range 0 00 300 00 um Default 0 50 um Set the internal diameter the length and film thickness of the capillary column in use These parameter values are used for calculation or the backward calculation of the column head pressure based on the column flow r
71. cee eee ene 115 11 2 2 Programmed aNalySiS vota abo ed a Ga ge oid ie Meade aha 115 11 2 3 Creating a temperature program 2 ete eee 115 Injection Port Packed Column Injection Port Dual INJ oooooooooonnmmoo 119 12 1 1 Setting the temperature with INJ key 000 cece eee 120 12 1 2 Setting the Flow Rate 0 c ett 122 12 1 3 Entering Columns Parameters 0 co 124 12 1 4 Creating a Flow Rate Program 0 0 c cet teen eee 125 Split Splitless Injection System 0 0c cee eee 126 GC 2014 3 gt Contents 12 2 1 Setting the temperature with INJ key oooooooooocoo 12 2 2 Setting the flow rate with FLOW key ooococcooccocccoo o 12 2 3 Setting column parameters 0 00 0c cee eee eee 12 2 4 Gas SAVE Mae ee OS ante Perec yeh ii Ged 12 2 5 Pressure PORTA can aca Agnes ea ew ele esi Ula 12 2 6 Creating a Flow rate program 000 e eee eee 12 2 7 Split ratio program aii eae oy ah ae Ree We Re eS 12 2 8 Septum PUDO le so sees deed ee eh Adol eke dee 12 2 9 High pressure injection and splitter fix mode 04 12 3 Direct Injection System 0 0 e eee eee 12 3 1 Setting the temperature 00 0002 cee 12 3 2 Setting the flowrate naunan aaan 12 4 AFC and APC Offset Calibration ooooooommooo 12 5 Setting the Flow Rate Parameters ooooooooommo o 13 Detector 13 1 Hydr
72. columns can be installed in positions described in Table 3 1 1 and Fig 3 1 1 Table 3 1 1 Installation location for injection ports detectors for packed columns Name Possible installation location ae Dual INJ 1 2 2 3 3 4 Injection ports Single INJ 1 4 Dual FID 6 7 Detectors TCD 9 10 Single DET 5 6 7 8 Installation location numbers indicate the positions of column connecting joints Fig 3 1 1 SS pese 1 12 43 iene ae AO z dades na Ti 8 E EE i O3 E Ss Fig 3 1 1 Installation location for injection ports detectors for packed columns layout viewed from the top of the unit GC 2014 31 Check which units the joints found on the column oven correspond to Fig 3 1 2 shows the layout for the GC 2014ATF SPL model Left and right sides viewed from the front of the unit are indicated as L left and R right respectively SPL OO000 000000000 c3 Dual INJ 0 200 Oooo 0000 DO000055 poog opon good oooo0000 jaonooooOoooooo L R TCD Fig 3 1 2 Column connecting joints GC 2014ATF SPL model 322 GC 2014 eee x 2 Dual Column Packed FID Analysis Connecting the left L sides and right R sides of the dual INJ and dual FID with columns respectively allows for analysis wit
73. for all detectors The signal out put channels can also be specified for installed detectors Det Sig which have not been configured in an analytical line o If two or more detectors are set to one channel data can be output to either channel without switching the output signal cable simply by changing the analytical line configuration GC 2014 241 242 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 7 3 Selecting the detector signals Select the signal type from the main screen and then press DET SIG to display the screen shown in Fig 16 6 7 Select the type of signal to output For a description of the settings refer to 13 Detector For detector signal subtraction also specify the channels 1 4 for the subtraction bisgnal Setting Channel 1 E Temp Flow output Signal Type For background signal com pensation also specify the background signal No 1 or 2 The currently set channel No is displayed gt Eackground sig comp Det sig subtraction Back Ground Number 4pEu ftil Fig 16 6 7 Detector signal setup screen 16 6 7 4 Selecting the temperature control signal Select the signal type from the main screen and then press TEMP to display the screen shown in Fig 16 6 8 Select the temperature control signal to be output Signal Setting Channel 1 Det 18 Flow Colum Temp SPL Temp fi DINJ
74. minute the screen display automatically returns to the monitor injection screen 2100 Retention Time 2100 Retention Time A Poorer ad a cc L o a ad a rec L A OTE 2 Temp Mon Flow Mon zero Adj Fig 10 1 1 Monitor injection screen GC 2014 109 10 Starting and Stopping Analysis 10 1 Making an Injecting and Starting an Analysis 10 1 2 Making manual injection E Aspiration 1 Preparation 10 uL Syringe Sample Rinse solvent Liquid waste container 2 Syringe handling precautions e es aa OEE Needle Barrel Plunger Plunger button Fig 10 1 2 Typical syringe The plunger keeps the sample from becoming contaminated Do not bend it or touch it Keep it clean Never bend the needle 3 Solvent pre wash Clean the syringe with solvent 3 to 5 times using the following procedure 1 Place the syringe into the rinse solvent Pull the plunger to aspirate approximately 10 ul of Solvent 2 Expel the solvent into the liquid waste container 4 Sample pre wash Flush the syringe with sample 3 to 5 times using the following procedure 1 Place the syringe into the sample Pull the plunger to aspirate approsimately 10 ul of sample 2 Expel the sample into the liquid waste container 5 Preparing to inject 1 With the needle in the sample vial pump the plunger to eliminate air bubbles inside the syringe 2 When air bubbles are eliminated aspirate exactly 1 ul of sample 3 Gently wipe
75. n gt F IIR i 4 gt On Temp it JRS 156 Temp t ME 220 0 Flame Flame signal Polarity E Filter Time Constant 2 me Filter Time Constant _ is Control Mode Dual Sisnal Output Port Chi EE Eackground sig save _ DEE Sisnal Output Port Chi Background sig comp eae Eackground sig save OTE Det sig subtraction off Background sig comp _ Off Signal Range se 71 Det sig subtraction Off Analog Signal Type Linear signal Range 1071 Analog Signal Type Linear a Dual FID b Single FID Fig 13 1 2 DET key main screen 13 1 2 2 Parameter list DETECTOR CONTROLLER Selection On Off Default On When a detector is set to On its current and voltage are controlled When a detector is configured in an analytical line and set to On here the detector is controlled and its signal monitored However even if a detector is set to Off the gas flow is controlled and the temperature increases to the set value if the detector is configured in an analytical line TEMP Range 0 0 400 C Default 25 0 C Set the detector temperature Normally set the detector temperature approximately 30 C higher than the final column oven temperature to prevent contamination by high boiling point compounds To set the maximum temperature limit refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits in 16 6 GC Configuration FLAME monitor only Selection On Off Select Or to ignite the flame Select Off to e
76. of the column R Inlet Pra kPa GG connected to the right inlet R Col flom Ho ENE 0 0 R Carrier gas type He Column EN On Off F NOTE Fig 12 1 3 FLOW key main screen When the control mode is set to Single L or Single R parameters of only specified side are displayed Inlet pressures can be monitored but cannot be set 12 1 2 2 Parameter list CONTROL MODE Selection Dual Single L Single R Default Dual When the control mode is set to Dual flow controllers on both left and right inlets are controlled When it is set to Single L or Single R a flow controller on either left or right inlet is controlled COLUMN FLOW RATE Range 0 0 100 0 ml min Default 50 0 ml min Set the flow rate of gas to be supplied to columns connected to left and right inlets A mass flow controller is used to control the column flow rate so gas is supplied at a specified flow rate even when the column resistance changes due to a column replacement or the column temperature changes CARRIER GAS TYPE Selection He N2 H2 Ar Default He Specify the type of carrier gas supplied to the AFC This parameter is used for the measurement control of the flow rate If this parameter is not set correctly calculations may not be performed correctly GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 1 Packed Column Injection Port Dual INJ 12 1 2 3 PF menu PF menu Description Referen
77. on the SET key main screen Customiz Set the parameters displayed on the SET key main screen 8 4 Print Prints temperature pressure and total flow rate on a Chromatopac Next Line Switches through each of the parameter screens in turn Press the SET key from the SET key main screen to switch to the next screen GC 2014 29 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management A 2 File Management 8 2 1 Screen description Select File PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen to display the file list shown in Fig 8 2 1 To change the current file enter a file No or move the cursor using the A and V key then press the Load PF menu key File Management I a aA FILE1 FILE2 FILES FILE4 FILES FILES FILE FILES FILES 0 FILEO CONVUSONa Ar FE a t un L DA d SA Fig 8 2 1 File list screen 8 2 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Load Selects the current file So Copy Copies file name and file contents from the source file to a destination file 8 2 3 File Init Initializes file name and file contents PA l i The current file cannot be initialized 2 Rename Changes the file name 8 2 4 GC 2014 95 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 2 File Management 8 2 3 Copying a file Select Copy PF menu on the file list screen to display the file copy screen shown in Fig 8 2 2 Enter the s
78. organic components eliminated Compressed air must be suppressed by an oil free compressor and dehumidified GC 2014 3 Gas supply pressures Carrier gas 300 980kPa Hydrogen 300 500kPa Makeup gas 300 980kPa Hydrogen 300 500kPa Air 300 500kPa NOTE The relationship of kPa and bar is as follows 100kPa 1bar Convert units between kPa and kgf cm as follows 1kPa 1 02 x 10 2kgf cm2 1kgf cm2 98 1kPa Convert the units between kPa and psi as follows 1kPa 1 45 x 10 Tpsi 1psi 6 89kPa 8 E GC 2014 eee 1 Installation 1 3 Gas Supply Plumbing gt E High pressure gas cylinder precautions AN WARNING HIGH PRESSURE Gas cylinders are under high pressure When handling gas cylinders instruction and safety measures provided by the gas supplier must be strictly observed to prevent accidents General precautions are provided below Consult state and local regulations for specific precautions Keep gas cylinders away from the lab preferably outdoors but not exposed to direct sun light The area must be well ventilated Use tubing to bring the gases to the lab The temperature of gas cylinders must not exceed 40 C Flammable items must be kept at least 2m from a gas cylinder When using high pressure gases pay strict attention to ventilation and perform daily leak checks In particular when using flammable gases such as hydrogen never smoke or allow open flame withi
79. parameters return to their default settings Once a file is initializen the action cannot be undone The current file cannot be initialized File Management 0 FILEO I A M 0 FILEA u A FILE FILES Ed FILEA FILES S FILES FILE E FILES E FILES Fig 8 2 4 Initializing a file GC 2014 2 97 98 8 3 1 29 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management a 3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config Screen description Select Line Confg PF menu from the SET key main screen to display the Line Configu ration screen shown in Fig 8 3 1 The SET key main screen displays the parameters for one analytical flow line The line configuration screen determines the components injection port detector s and options of the analytical flow line When the system is turned on the temperatures are controlled for the components in the flow line If the AFC is present carrier gas is supplied to the specified injection port If APC is present detector gases are supplied to the detector s specified One injection port and up to two detecotrs can be included in an analytical flow line Temperatures are not controlled and gases are not supplied to conponents which are not part of the analytical flow line The line configuration screen displays all the components installed Move the cursor to the desired component using the A and V keys Use the lt and
80. sleep time elapses Select Off to disable automatic GC restart GC 2014 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 1 SYSTEM Key Main Screen 7 1 3 PF menu PF menu ee Reference Description A item section Start GC Starts GC according to the parameters on the SYSTEM key main screen a Starts GC according to the parameters on the SYSTEM key main screen If no program is running the stop time countdown begins immediately when Stop GC Stop GC PF menu is selected If Stop GC is selected while a program is running the stop time countdown begins after the program finishes File Displays the file list to change to another method file 8 2 On this sub screen select files to load edit copy initialize and rename f Sets clean up parameters Clean Up In system ON status select direct operation PF menu to run the clean up fia Sets the parameters for the next GC start up Start Seq Start time detector and clean up parameters on this sub screen are 7 3 immediately reflected on the SYSTEM key main screen Sets the stop procedures Stop Seq This item is not displayed in system ON status nA Prepares the GC for maintenance of the injection port replacement of 4 3 General septum glass insert etc maintenance Maint INJ When GC i dyf int th GCi dyf int 5 procedures en is ready for maintenance the message is ready for maintenance in the operation appears manual Anal Restores the GC for analys
81. stable baseline despite considerable baseline fluctuations DET SIG SUBTRACTION Selection Off DET 1 DET 2 DET 3 DET 4 Default Off Subtracts the detector signal of one detector from the signal of another detector This function is mainly used in a dual column flow line to subtract the data acquired without an injection from the data acquired with an injection The background signal is elimi nated For the details on background save and background compensation refer to 13 4 Background Compensation SIGNAL RANGE Selection x1 x10 1 x10 2 x10 3 x10 4 Default x10 1 Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient 10 for a linear analog signal type If the data processing unit is saturated for example change the setting from x1 to x10 1 from x10 2 to x10 3 In case of the digital signal the signal is always output with x1 SIGNAL ATTENUATION Selection x1 x2 1 x2 2 x2 3 x2 4 Default x2 1 Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient 2 for a wide analog signal type If the data processing unit is saturated for example change the setting from x1 to x2 1 from x2 2 to x2 3 In case of the digital signal the signal is always output with x1 ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE Selection Linear Wide Default Linear Set this item when the GC is connected to a Chromatopac in analog format Wide Select wide when connecting the GC to the C R8A C R7A C R7A plus The GC outputs s
82. standby without igniting CLEAN UP Selection Off Analysis Para Clean Up Para Default Off Clean up indicates running a GC program without injecting sample Select whether to run the clean up program after the GC enters Ready status If the maximum temperature of the clean up oven temperature program is too close to maximum temperature of the column select Analysis Para to perform clean up using a regular analysis program STOP TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default 0 0 min Sets the period of time after Stop GC PF menu is pressed or after a program finishes if the program was running to stop temperature control and cool the heated zones FLOW OFF TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default because the gas control is set to Cont Sets the period of time after temperature detector control ends until gas control ends This item cannot be set if Flow Control is Cont that is if carrier gas is kept flowing FLOW CONTROL Selection End Cont Default Cont Select End to stop gas control after the flow OFF time finishes This stops the flow of carrier gas Select Cont to continue the carrier gas flow SLEEP TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default because the RESTART GC is set to Off Sets the period of time after temperature detector control ends until the GC restarts This item cannot be set if the GC is set to not restart RESTART GC Selection On Off Default Off Select On to restart the GC after the
83. the right inlet E Colum length m 25 0 R Film thickness um a 56 Fig 12 1 4 Column parameters entering screen 12 1 3 2 Parameter list COLUMN I D internal diameter Range 0 01 6 00 mm Default 0 32 mm COLUMN LENGTH Range 0 1 250 0 m Default 25 0 m FILM THICKNESS Range 0 00 300 00 um Default 0 50 um GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 1 Packed Column Injection Port Dual INJ gt 12 1 4 Creating a Flow Rate Program Column flow rate can be increased or decreased during analysis by making a flow rate program 12 1 4 1 Screen description Select L Flow Prog or R Flow Prog PF menu on the FLOW key main screen to display the screen shown in Fig 12 1 5 Carrier Flow CARS Ge a FILE L Flow monitor MET L Program total min a 0A Rate a Flow Time min Up to 7 ramps of flow rate ip eS 30 ae increase decrease can be set lat END Eeturn Del Lire Ins Line Fig 12 1 5 Flow rate program setup screen e g L flow rate program 12 1 4 2 Parameter list FLOW RATE Range 0 00 100 0 ml min Default 50 ml min Set the initial flow rate and the final flow rate for each stage of the flow rate program TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Set the hold time for the initial flow rate and final flow rate for each stage of the flow rate program RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 ml min Default END Set the flow rate program rate If you set the rate to 0
84. time scheduler is operating the mode cannot be changed E Schedule number and day of the week The table below shows the relationship between the schedule number and the day of the week Mode 1 Mode 2 schedule number day No 0 Sun No 1 Mon No 2 Tue No 3 Wed No 4 Thu No 5 Fri No 6 Sat No 7 2 212 GC 2014 16 1 4 Editing a time schedule Select 2 EDIT from the time scheduler menu to display the schedule number or the day of the week setup screen shown in Fig 16 1 3 Before editing a schedule select the schedule number or the day of the week and press Edit PF menu Then the schedule edit screen shown in Fig 16 1 4 appears You do not have to set schedules in the order of execution time After editing time schedules they are automatically sorted More than one schedule can be set to the same time These schedules will be executed at the same time 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler Inactive schedule Number d Return a schedule Ho Inactive schedule Time Function Value 1 Af Oa Start GC 2 19 00 Stop GC Fig 16 1 3 Schedule number selection screen 16 1 5 PF menu Fig 16 1 4 Schedule edit screen gt PF menu Description Releience section New Creates a new time schedule 16 1 6 Del Line Deletes a schedule line at the current cursor position GC 2014 213
85. to 17 4 Event No 16 5 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Execute Runs the specified operation Input event No to be run and press Execute PF menu GC 2014 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 6 GC Configuration 16 6 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen to display the GC configuration screen shown in Fig 16 6 1 PUESLIOn EC Configuration eS Date Time Setting Batch Max Temperature Time Program A ransmiseion Parameter E Pre Rin Ed Ready Check BS Direct Operation G Signal Setting HIGEC Configuration G Port Name Customization Service Maintenance Link Device Code E Stop Watch E Temperature Offset E Lock fe Other Configurations Select function a function Fig 16 6 1 GC Configuration setup screen 16 6 2 Parameter list DATE TIME SETTING Set the date and the time MAX TEMPERATURE Set the maximum temperature limit for each headed zone TRANSMISSION PARAMETER Set the parameters related to transmission READY CHECK Indicate the conditions which should be satisfied in order for the system to be ready and the STATUS light to illuminate SIGNAL SETTING Set the signals which can be output from the gas chromatograph PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION Customize the names of various GC items LINK DEVICE CODE Set the link device code the GC is linked to a Chromatopac GC 2014 235 16 Special Functions 16 6
86. to be analyzed and carrier gas However the data processing unit normally calculates the area of a plus peak When a minus peak is detected signal polarity needs to be inverted into a plus peak In this case inject a sample into the opposite inlet of the one instructed on the popup screen shown below Signal polarity can be changed using the time program during analysis For detailed descriptions about setting the time program refer to 16 3 Time Program a 2100 Retention Time a M SAARA A ASAS M A O 1 008 tnD0B speed GC 2014 gt 41 29 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 5 5 Packed Analysis Using the Single DET To perform glass packed column analysis using the unit with the single DET single FID ECD FPD and FTD for packed analysis move the dual INJ to the front of the single DET prior to connecting a column Single DET Dual FID TCD Dual INJ Dual AFC Fig 3 5 1 Single DET configuration NOTE 1 When a SUS column is used the dual INJ does not need to be moved 2 If the single packed INJ is installed in front of the single DET analysis can be performed without moving the dual INJ For detailed descriptions refer to instruction manual of the single packed INJ NM CAUTION Dual INJ is set on the single mode so carrier gas is not fed to the unspecified port L on the figure above Do not connect a column to the port
87. types of columns are connected to the left and right sides in order to obtain a different chromatogram when a sample is injected to the L and R of the dual INJ Column L Column R Dual INJ Dual AFC Fig 3 4 1 Dual column configuration TCD AN CAUTION 1 Carrier gas has to be fed to both of left and right L R sides of the TCD Using the TCD without carrier gas will damage the filament 2 During analysis with a single column connect a pipe to the other flow path instead of a column and feed carrier gas NOTE Do not cross the columns L R It hinders correct analysis 2 If left and right columns are extremely different e g liquid quantity flow rate zero point may not be achieved by turning the control on the right side of the GC unit In this case adjust the column flow rate on the side that a sample is not analyzed reference side GC 2014 39 40 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 3 4 Packed TCD Analysis E Setting analytical flow lines Setting analytical flow lines is described below For procedures to install columns and input analytical conditions refer to the operation manual Seta line 1 Press the SET key and then press the PF2 key Line Config 2 Set the dual INJ DINJ and TCD DTCD on a same line LINE1 is specified in the example below Lines 1 through 4 can be selected Line Configurati
88. zeroes the detector sig nal when the GC is ready GC 2014 61 62 5 Analysis 5 1 Analysis Flow Chart 5 1 3 Analysis Set the data processing unit Check the baseline Inject the sample Perform the required settings for the data processing unit such as specifying the processing parameters Press the MONIT key and ensure that the baseline is stable When the baseline is stable you can start analysis Press Zero Adg PF menu to zero the detector output if necessary Aspirate the sample in the syringe inject it into the GC injection port and press START to analyze it Wear protective goggles when using a syringe to inject samples y L The syringe plunger could be expelled due to injection port back pressure Sample could get into the eyes By holding and supporting the plunger from the side with your middle finger you can smoothly inject the sample and keep the plunger in the syringe Do not bend the plunger when holding Example the syringe in this position NM WARNING Hold here Y How to hold a syringe when injection GC 2014 29 5 Analysis s 2 Notes for Analysis E Analytical column Make sure that carrier gas is flowing through the column before increasing the column oven temperature because the column cannot separate compounds properly when its liquid phase is oxidized This is especially important for polar columns Press the SYSTEM key and set a start time s
89. 02 TCD signal zero error No The difference in filament resistance is high between the TCD cells and the detector cannot be zeroed If the zero point cannot be adjusted even by turning the adjuster on the right side of the unit the detector control unit may have failed The system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2014 295 296 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages 18 1 6 Detector ignition errors Code Message CS 4203 DET 1 ignition failed No 4204 DET 2 ignition failed No 4205 DET S ignition failed No 4206 DET 4 ignition failed No These messages appear when the FID or FPD do not ignite within a certain time after the key is pressed Even when one of these messages appears hydrogen gas keeps flowing when a manual flow controller is used Shut off the hydrogen gas for safety then check the following items 1 The column is connected 2 Hydrogen is supplied at proper flow rate Air is supplied at proper flow rate The jet of the FID is not clogged Unused FID is not set to On 2 3 4 Filament of the igniter is intact 5 6 Code Message cS 4207 H2 AIR APC are not ready No This message appears when the APC used to control detector gas for hydrogen or air is not Ready at the time of ignition Check that the gas supply pressure is stable and whether or not gas is lea
90. 1 2 Parameter list 5 cas aris case sierstle a tah sage at A AA atk ance AR AEE A hdl eae 196 15 1 3 PE MENU A en ee epee Rh A 197 15 1 4 AOC priority analysis sz fri tee pee A a illo 198 15 1 5 Parametros sect toons os need eee ewan os hed Ate dae bag ena 198 15 1 6 PE menus ini aA oa tata oie a at eae taeda es Aedes Gea Pe ae a 199 15 1 7 Other AOC parameters neua si ed oe id Sane Paid ede de bee ee a dl 199 15 1 8 Other ADC Parameter tic yates dads ae eed REA A a oe Rade Fa ease ees ae 200 15 1 9 PE Me Wintec toed eee tothe bebe ede pe altd Mente od oh ho eed ede de a 201 15 1 10 Auto sampler carousel and other optional parameters 00000 cece eee 202 15 1 11 Parameter lis lila delo e e Ro Teves EA Asia 202 Setting AUX Temperature 0 cece eee eee 203 15 2 1 screendescription ss a aat see See a a ia a a eid 203 15 2 2 Parameter list ssa crape ari A AAA A AE RATA A ae Rose 203 15 2 3 PF MON Ut ne oo rd A da de deh a 203 15 2 4 On Off setting 000 2 ia dd Pe cea ore 204 15 2 5 On Off parameter St ccoo tea Rees oe aes Gece a hea A enta 204 Setting the AUX APC Parameters 00 cece eee eee eee 205 15 3 1 screen description siais ai 4s soe Seek lade Sent da eae RA Ae heed 205 15 3 2 Parameter list ssi ceva a canna A AAA Hegde She AA RA ae aa on ee 206 15 3 3 PE MO Usted dd er aed Wotton dh da fe tela 206 Setting the AUX AMC Parameters o o ocoococooo 207 15 4 1 Screen description cai ici a a a die 207 15 4
91. 2 Parameter list dr yum ri A seat 6 ti o Pt ds a ee 208 15 4 3 PM AA A 208 Setting the CRG Parameters o o ocooccococo eee eee 209 15 5 1 Screen description sii ed ee teat He a ee A dA ees 209 15 5 2 Parameter IS tect iaa 210 15 5 3 PF menu a ie ey eb be ar eee aed ee 210 Special Functions Time Scheduler siaa peel A Mees ese epee al oo tee eek 211 16 1 1 description Screens mieua ne nae eka ar oad ee sa eA Ea ee ee ele eee 211 GC 2014 vi gt Contents 16 1 2 Parametros tet tes at AA ta Res qe eaves eat ed 211 16 1 3 Setting the mode iii a od A ee oe BR eee 212 16 1 4 Editing a time schedule toi esses ti See itt dl Medians a tada 213 16 1 5 PF Me its A a Ao Ea 213 16 1 6 Creating a new time schedule ooococcoccocoor nea 214 16 1 7 A O RN RN 214 16 1 8 Parameters available in the time scheduler 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 215 16 1 9 Changing schedule parameters nnau 0000 e eects 215 16 1 10 Time schedule example 0 00 0 216 16 1 11 Starting stopping a time schedule 0 00 ccc tee 217 TOA PE MON is ese a is A vain kod on ote AA pa at A a Ane A 217 16 1 13 Copying and deleting a time schedule 0 0 0 0c eee 218 16 2 Batch Schedule ioir ieni iaaa oe a EAr 219 16 2 1 screen description v2 2 tess eebde dee bead onde ed add th a bd eee 219 16 2 2 Parameter iS cosa daa ca deve FR beat ga ate ote 220 16 2 3 PE M s oh aes tee ik ie Sa AA oe ie Sea Oke ee e
92. 221 40609 GC 2014 Gas Chromatograph INSTRUCTION MANUAL Read this instruction manual thoroughly before using this instrument Save the manual for future reference SHIMADZU CORPORATION ANALYTICAL amp MEASURING INSTRUMENTS DIVISION KYOTO JAPAN Copyright O Shimadzu Corporation 2004 All rights are reserved including those to reproduce this publication or parts there of in any form without permission in writing from Shimadzu Corporation Information in this publication is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the vendor Any errors or omissions which may have occurred in this publication despite the utmost care taken in its production will be corrected as soon as possible but not necessarily immediately upon detection Note that Shimadzu does not have any obligation concerning the effects resulting from the appli cation of the contents of this manual About this USER s MANUAL GC 2014 user s manual consists of the two separate manuals as described below Operation Manual Part number 221 40607 It describes procedures necessary to operate the instrument Instruction Manual Part number 221 40609 this manual It describes the instrument s functions and how to use them Safety precautions are included in the operation manual Please read them before using the instrument WARNING LABELS Label conventions for this manual are provided below Indi
93. A AA AAA A AAA a e iE 88 7 4 3 System shut down examples 00 000 c cette eee eee eee 89 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management SET Key Main Screen 000 cece eee 91 8 1 1 Mainscreen A ate dihwleddlnnls a a a a tdi bots aaraa beat 91 8 1 2 Parameter list sanior eona gy air og argos Wd Wea Rede oe 92 8 1 3 A dads an oe ee de di hn ee eee eed A ad Oe a eek Be dea 94 File Management 2 0c cece eee eee eee eee eee 95 8 2 1 screen description asaca niee nati hoda ao aes ee ee eed al ie wb ede ad 95 8 2 2 DEMONIO AA nana AA aid 95 8 2 3 Copying afiles cicVoriccaita adri rra a Bhd ek Bad ee ee 96 8 2 4 Renaming filesi ea a tars ety tee land a pai Ha ie a Sead daa we 96 8 2 5 initializing a file sae i ste alo Bt AA A eh id Sa ee Ee we eat 97 GC 2014 8 3 8 4 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 10 10 1 10 2 11 12 12 1 12 2 gt Contents Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config 98 8 3 1 Screen description ikeen nscale hse ee eddie sins Sec Pe end Ree Se ae ee oe 98 Changing Items Displayed with Customiz lt lt ooooommomooo 101 8 4 1 SCENES CON ia a fod Eee eae ee 101 Monitoring the GC MONIT key Main Screen 2 00 ee ee 103 9 1 1 SCLECMGSSCHPUON A A yet tne satin O O a tte 103 9 1 2 Parameter list mis ta edb e ba Bad 105 9 1 3 PROM rra u dc he le dete saint See dec ete ley das oat at etapa ne aa ia 105 M
94. CARRIER Capillary column Fig 12 3 1 GC 2014 145 12 Injection Port 12 3 Direct Injection System 12 3 1 Setting the temperature 12 3 1 1 Screen description Press the INJ key to display the injection port main screen shown in Fig 12 3 2 and to set the injection port temperature jection Fort CARS E 4 FILES ACTUAL SETTING Temp tt 106 100 0 Fig 12 3 2 INJ key main screen 12 3 1 2 Parameter list TEMP Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the injection port temperature Keep the injection port at the lowest practical temperature for the analysis this prolongs the service life of the temperature sensor To instantly vaporize the injected sample set the injection port temperature approximately 30 C higher than the final column oven temperature Because the sample quantity is usually minute the sample is vaporized at temperatures lower than the boiling point of sample compounds To set the maximum temperature limit refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits in 16 6 GC Configuration 12 3 1 3 PF menu Reference PF menu Description E section Print Prints the temperature program to a Chromatopac oa Toggles to the next setup screen when two or more injection ports are Next Inj installed in this system _ The INJ key can also be used to switch screens 146 GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 3 Direct Injection System 3 gt 12 3 2 S
95. CHEDULER START FINAL GC FILE DP FILE INJ MK COMNAD 1 5 0 Ch 1 2 1 STANDARD STEST 6 15 0 Ch 1 2 3 UNKNOWN END Fig 17 1 5 A GC 2014 A 273 17 Printing 17 1 Printing 17 1 2 6 Log From each screen of the GC operation log the analysis log the parameter log the error log and the diagnostic log press Print PF menu to print the parameters displayed on the screen For the analysis log only the list screen is printed The contents of the detailed analysis screen are not printed For example press Print PF menu from the error log screen to obtain the following printed results NOTE The log items are printed in chronological order starting from the oldest GCERROT LOG TIME OCCURED CODE ERROR MESSAGE VALUE 200 05 16 14 21 E1020 DET1 sensor down error 530 00 200 05 16 14 27 E0031 INJ DET2 A D error 200 05 16 14 27 E0032 AUX1 AUX3 A D error 200 05 16 14 27 E0011 CAR1 AFC PCB error 7 00 200 05 16 14 27 E0030 COL A D error 200 05 16 14 27 E0001 DC5V range error 8 43 200 05 16 14 27 E0002 DC24V range error 20 34 200 05 16 14 27 E0034 Battery voltage error 0 26 200 05 16 14 27 E0005 Room temp range error 84 27 200 05 16 14 27 E1019 INJ1 sensor down error 530 00 200 05 16 14 27 E1018 COL sensor down error 530 00 200 05 16 14 27 E1020 DET1 sensor down error 530 00 200 05 16 14 28 E0031 INJ1 DET2 A D error 200 05 16 14 28 E0032 AUX1 AUX3 A D error 200
96. D 250 0 250 0 C min Default END Set the program rate for the oven temperature program Set the rate to 0 END appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp Move the cursor to END and set any numeric value other than 0 to complete the temperature and the time for that ramp EQUILIBRATION TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 3 00 min After the programs finish and the oven temperature returns to the initial value the equilibration time must elapse befor the system is considered Ready This allows for even temperature distribution 11 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description pintas Del Line Deletes the current line A Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position Fan Off Stops the fan operation Fan On Restarts the fan operation E Print Prints the column oven program from a Chromatopac a NOTE Fan Off cannot be operated when the column oven temperature setting value is 40 C or higher or a program is running 114 GC 2014 1 1 3 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program 2 Temperature Programs 11 2 1 Isothermal analysis The isothermal analysis technique keeps the column oven temperature at a constant value This method is useful for separating compounds within a narrow boiling point range 11 2 2 Programmed analysis When the sample contains compounds over a wide boiling point range isothermal analysis is irsufficient for separating all the com
97. DET key can also be used to switch screens When the optional solenoid valve to shut off supply gas is installed VLV On or hydrogen and air are shut off by the valve until ignition VLV Off Opens the solenoid valve when VLV On is displayed and closes the valve when VLV Off is displayed GC 2014 13 Detector 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID 3 gt 13 1 3 Setting the Detector Gas manual flow controller Hydrogen and air are supplied to the FID as detector gas For capillary analysis makeup gas is required to prevent peak tailing and optimize FID sensitivity GC 2014 has flow controllers according to models as described below Models with the dual FID GC 2014AF GC2014ATF etc Two flow paths of manual flow controllers with hydrogen and air Models with the single FID GC 2014AFsc etc One flow path of manual flow controller with hydrogen and air One flow path of manual flow controller for makeup gas Set the detector gas flow rate following the procedures described below 1 Turn the main valve of the gas cylinder to supply gas to the GC 2 Open the flow controller cover on the top of the back of the unit Layouts for the models with the dual FID and models with the single FID are as shown in Fig 13 1 3 a and Fig 13 1 3 b respectively Right Flow controller Flow controller for the left side FID for the right side FID o Top K N NN E Makeup gas E
98. E Selection 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Default 9600 bps Set the communication speed STOP BIT Selection 1 bit 2 bit Default 1 bit PARITY Selection NONE EVEN ODD Default NONE STOP BIT and PARITY can be set when PROTOCOL is set to None or LEVEL1 or LEVEL2 Set to EVEN in case of connecting a Chromatopac NOTE Refer to 2 3 Outputting Digital Signals to a Personal Computer and 2 4 Connecting a RS 232C Cable to the Chromatopac C R8A 16 6 5 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Apply Down loads the parameters immediately 238 GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 6 Setting the Ready Check Parameters The Ready Check verifies whether the preset analytical conditions have been met When the selected items reach the specified settings the STATUS light illuminates 16 6 6 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 4 READY CHECK to display the ready check screen shown in Fig 16 6 5 Set each parameter to yes or no All parameters with yes must reach their initial parameter starts in order for the GC to be ready and the STATUS light to turn green Ready Check READY HU Heater Port TTT Column Temp Yes BEFL Temp Yes GOIN Temp Yes EDFID Temp Yes ESDTCD Temp Yes Mu Carrier Gas TMM EEPL Ye
99. F menu is displayed For AFC press the FLOW key once and the toggle key twice Flow CARL Flow DET 1 He Lon Inlet press k a Ao 100 7 Presa kPa G Column flow Yn GREE Flow it A G Liner vel Ce he We eee enn cee ay Split ratio MakeUp On Total flow 3a Presa kPa A 0 split mode Flow i Control mode Gas Kind Carrier gas type He e Air Or Press kPa ogl Flowin E 500 0 dvanced Offset Next Flow a Fig 12 4 1 AFC Fig 12 4 2 APC Press Offset PF menu The message Zero Calibration Start appears Approximately 10 seconds later the message Zero calibration completed appears indicating that the calibration is complete Return the septum of the injection port to its original position if it has been detached GC 2014 3 12 Injection Port 1 2 e 5 Setting the Flow Rate Parameters 150 E Linear velocity and carrier gas selection In capillary analysis the type and the flow rate of the carrier gas have a considerable effect on the column efficiency The figure below shows changes in the HETP Height Equivalent to Theoretical Plate at different linear velocity valves for nitrogen helium and hydrogen car rier gas HETP H2 10 20 30 40 ens Carrier gas linear velocity Fig 12 5 1 Effect on linear velocity and HETP for various carrier gases H V curve The graph above shows that the lowest HETP values are obtained when nitrogen is used as the carrier gas and th
100. FLOW CONTROL End FLOW OFF TIME Approx 20 minutes A column is conditioned then the column over is cooled Carrier gas flow is then shut down STOP TIME Column conditioning time FLOW CONTROL End FLOW OFF TIME Approx 20 minutes At the end of an analysis each heated zone is cooled but carrier gas is kept flowing for rapid equilibration for the next day s analysis The next day the system is automati cally restarted 15 hours 900 minutes later and temperature control resumes START TIME 0 minutes because the carrier gas continued to flow STOP TIME 0 minutes FLOW CONTROL Cont to keep carrier gas flow on RESTART GC On SLEEP TIME 900 minutes at the end of the SLEEP TIME the GC restarts At the end of an analysis each heated zone is cooled and the carrier gas flow is stopped once the column oven is cool The following day 15 hours 900 minutes later carrierr gas flow is turned back on and temperature control begins START TIME 10 minutes because carrier gas flow was off STOP TIME 0 minute FLOW CONTROL End FLOW OFF TIME Approx 20 minutes RESTART GC On SLEEP TIME 900 minutes at the end of the SLEEP TIME the GC restarts GC 2014 89 90 EE GC 2014 eee 8 1 1 29 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 1 SET Key Main Screen Main screen Press the SET key to display the main screen shown in Fig 8 1 1 and to make frequently used parameter settin
101. Fig 4 4 1 Capillary TCD The figure above shows an example where makeup gas and reference gas are connected to the left L and right R sides of the dual INJ respectively and a column and reference gas piping are connected to the left L and right R sides of the TCD respectively They can be connected to either side L R AN CAUTION 1 Carrier gas makeup gas and reference gas has to be fed to both of left and right L R sides of the TCD Using the TCD without carrier gas will damage the filament 2 When makeup gas and reference gas are supplied from the dual AFC TCD filament s protection mechanism does not work even if an error occurs 54 GC 2014 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 4 4 Capillary TCD Analysis E Setting analytical flow lines Setting analytical flow lines is described below For procedures to install columns and input analytical conditions refer to the operation manual 1 Change the dual AFC configuration 1 Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION on the FUNC key screen and then select 9 Other configuration 2 Specify AMC LR at DAFC unit 2 Set a line 1 Press the SET key and then press the PF2 key Line Config Uther Contigurations Language English Backlight auto off sec _ 4 Pressure unit kPa Esep volume Hig Esep tone Hi tmospheric compensation Off zero at Ready n Folarity in Ready _Open SPL P
102. GC Configuration TEMPERATURE OFFSET Set the temperature offset for each heated zone OTHER CONFIGURATIONS Specify the configuration of miscellaneous setup items 16 6 3 Setting the date and time 16 6 3 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 1 DATE TIME SETTING to display the Date Time setting screen shown in Fig 16 6 2 The date and the time can be set This setting is automatically saved even when the GC power is off Dates Time Setting The current date and time ____ 2014 01 01 Wed 0 00 00 H are displayed Date yyyy mm dd 2014 1 1 Time hh mm Fig 16 6 2 Date time setup screen 16 6 3 2 Parameter list DATE Range 2000 01 01 2099 12 31 TIME Range 00 00 00 23 59 59 236 GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration gt 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits 16 6 4 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 2 MAX TEMPERATURE to display the Max Temperature screen shown in Fig 16 6 3 Set the maximum temperature limits of 8 heated zones fax Temperature Colum Hax Temp E 400 0 SPL Hax Temp t _ 420 0 DINJ Max Temp t 420 0 DFID Max Temp E3 420 6 DTCD Hax Temp _ 20 0 AUX3 Hax Tempt AUKA Max Temp it ALES Max TempLt WReturn Protect Fig 16 6 3 Maximum temp
103. Main Screen PURGE FLOW RATE Range Refer to Fig 12 2 15 Default 3 0ml min Set the septum purge flow rate SAMPLING TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Sets the sampling time for splitless analysis The sampling time indicates the period of time after analysis starts until the split flow line is opened SPLIT MODE Selection SPLIT SPLITLESS DIRECT SPLIT SPLITLESS DIRECT Default SPLIT Controls the column inlet pressure and the total flow rate so that the column inlet pressure and split ratio occur as specified Closes the split flow line during the sampling time so that the set column inlet pressure is controlled by the Total Flow Controller Opens the split flow line and controls the Electronid Split Controller so that the preset column inlet pressure occurs Refer to Fig 12 2 2 after the sampling time elapses Closes the split flow line and the set column inlet pressure in pressure mode or the set total flow rate in flow mode occurs When making direct injection analyses select WBI in the setup screen so that SPLIT mode is not available CONTROL MODE Selection PRESS VELOCITY FLOW for direct injection mode Default PRESS When the injection mode is set to SPLIT or SPLITLESS PRESS Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant When the injection mode is set to DIRECT PRESS Contro
104. N TIME Rt 105 ROM 176 ROOM TEMPERATURE 175 SAMPLING TIME 93 130 Schedule number 212 Screen 67 69 Septum purge flow rate 93 septum purge flow rate 93 141 SET key 68 91 set values 69 SIGNAL ATTENUATION 155 167 SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT 155 167 SIGNAL POLARITY 155 166 SIGNAL RANGE 155 167 SLEEP TIME 80 Split injection system 126 SPLIT MODE 93 130 SPLIT RATIO 92 130 Split ratio program 139 Splitless injection system 126 Splitter Fix 143 Standard Diagnosis 173 Standard Installation Test 192 START key 67 68 111 112 start procedure 86 START TEMP DET 80 START TIME 80 Starting an Analysis 109 STATUS 70 STATUS lamp 67 STOP BIT 238 STOP key 67 68 112 stop procedure 88 STOP TIME 80 Stopping Analysis 112 Stopwatch 263 SYSTEM key 67 68 TCD 164 TEMP 70 114 154 165 TEMP lamp 67 TEMP SENSOR DIAG 175 TEMP SENSOR USE TIME 175 temperature control signal 242 Temperature offset 251 temperature program 115 Thermal Conductivity Detector 164 TIME 236 Time Program 225 Time Scheduler 211 Toggle key 68 72 TOTAL FLOW RATE 92 130 148 U vV VALVE 210 VLV Off 156 VLV On 156 157 W WATCH DOG TIMER 176 Z Zero Adj 105 108 Zero Free 105 108 Zero free 108 Symbol 68 72 67 68 GC 2014 305 306 ME GC 2014 eee
105. Off On Auto Default Off Select one of the following three modes Off Disables splitter fix mode On Fixes the split flow line immediately Auto Automatically enters splitter fix mode after analysis finishes and the system returns to ready status FIX TIME Range 0 0 9999 99 min Default 0 10 min Set the period of time to be in splitter fix mode When SPLITTER FIX MODE is set to On indicate the period of time after SPLITTER FIX MODE is set to Or to exit splitter fix mode When SPLITTER FIX MODE is set to Auto set the period of time after the analysis starts to exit splitter fix mode NOTE Using splitter fix mode for long periods of time may interfere with constant pressure negatively affect ing reproducibility of results 144 GC 2014 3 12 Injection Port 1 2 A 3 Direct Injection System E Direct injection system In a direct injection system a wide bore 0 53 mm or greater column is used Nearly the entire amount of sample injected is inrtoduced on the column This usually results in better sensitivity than narrow bore columns with split injections However peak shapes are broad which decreases resolution and can lead to a higher S N ratio The direct injection system uses a WBI wide bore injection injection port When WBI is specified DIRECT injection mode is automatically used and split mode is not available on the INJ key main screen ca PURGE SS PURGE VENT
106. R Col flow A ENS 50 0 A TN DIN TTT 50 0 Tempt G 35 0 LA DET TCO TTT Temp t 25 0 LineConfg Customiz GC 2014 17 18 2 Before Use 2 1 Setting Analytical Flow Lines Analytical flow lines NOTE An analytical flow line consists of the flow controller injection port column detector cell and detector amp as shown in Fig 2 1 1 During analysis the flow controller feeds carrier gas to the injection port a sample injected to the injection port goes through the column to reach to the detector cell and a detected signal is amplified by the detector amp to be outputted In order to allow the gas chromatograph to recognize these units as an analytical flow line specification for the connection between them is necessary For regular analysis specify the combination between an injection port and detector to which a column is connected Refer to the following page for setting procedures Connections of the flow controller s and injection port s and connections of detector cell s and detector amplifier s are specified by a serviceperson at shipment or installation They do not need to be specified for regular analysis Fig 2 1 2 shows a representative example of the line configuration for packed column FID analysis using the GC 2014 In this example the dual INJ and dual FID are connected with two columns and the difference between two FID signals is outputted from the dua
107. SETTING OTHER 25 0 Print ext On Off Fig 15 2 1 Main screen to set AUX temperature 15 2 2 Parameter list TEMPERATURE SETTING VALUE Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 25 0 C 15 2 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Print Prints each temperature through a Chromatopac 17 1 NEXT Toggles the screen among AOC parameters AUX temperature gt AUX APC AUX AMC CRG screens in this order On Off Displays a sub screen to set a used unit to On 15 2 4 GC 2014 203 15 Optional Devices 15 2 Setting AUX Temperature 15 2 4 On Off setting When On Off PF menu is pressed on the main screen to set AUX temperature the screen to set On Off appears AUX Temp On Off Name Control OTHER 4 On Fig 15 2 2 Screen to set On Off of AUX temperature 15 2 5 On Off parameter list TEMPERATURE CONTROL Selection On Off Default On Temperature is controlled when On is selected 204 GC 2014 3 15 Optional Devices 1 5 3 Setting the AUX APC Parameters The pressure the flow rate and the gas type can be set for the AUX APC 15 3 1 Screen description When the optional AUX APC is installed press the OPTION key to display the screen shown in Fig 15 3 1 If a different screen appears press the OPTION key again or NEXT PF menu to display the correct screen The screen toggles among AOC parameters AUX temperature gt AUX APC AUX AMC
108. Selection Slow Middle Fast Default Fast Set the plunger speed during rinsing with sample or pumping SYRINGE HEIGHT 1 Range 0 20 mm Default O mm Set the syringe height when it moves down to a sample vial moves syringe up from default SYRINGE HEIGHT Range 0 2 mm 1 5 ml vial 0 10 mm 4 ml vial Default 0 mm Set the syringe height when it moves down to a sample vial moves syringe down from default SYRINGE HEIGHT INJ Range 0 22 mm Default O mm Set the syringe height when it moves down during sample injection moves syringe up from default 200 GC 2014 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters gt MULTI INJ Range 1 99 Default 1 Set the number of times to inject each sample KINDS OF VIALS Selection 1 5 ml 4 ml Default 1 5 ml Specyfy the vial type RACK Selection Short Long Default Short Set the rack type KINDS OF THE SYRINGE Selection 10 p1 50 pl 250 pl Default 10 yl Set the syringe type SUCTION VOLUME FOR WASHING Selection 80 60 Default 80 Set the aspiration volume during sample wash and pumping RACK POSITION Range 0 2 Default 1 Set the rack position while sampler is used 15 1 9 PF menu Reference PF menu Description i section Inj Mode For details refer to 3 3 3 Injection mode in AOC 20 User s Manual GC 2014 201 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 10 Auto sampler carousel and other optional parameters
109. Shimadzu representative Abnormal PRG current Code Message CS 0039 PRG current error Yes Electric current in the optional PRG board is abnormal The system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Flow controller AMC board failure Code Message CS 0040 CAR1 DAFC PCB error No 0041 CAR2 DAFC PCB error No 0042 AMC 1 2 PCB error No 0043 AMC 3 4 PCB error No 0044 AMC 5 6 PCB error No 0045 AMC 7 8 PCB error No 0046 AMC 9 10 PCB error No 0047 CAR1 SAFC PCB error No 0048 CAR2 SAFC PCB error No If the above error messages appear the hardware has failed The GC system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2014 285 286 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages 18 1 2 Temperature control errors Heat loss Code Message cs 1001 Heat is escaping Yes This message appears when heat loss is substantial The oven door may be open or the insulation has a hole If the column oven door is open close it and select Reset Error If the insulation has a hole in it turn off the power of the unit repair the hole and then restart the system This error may not occur even when the door is open when the column oven temperature is set at a certain range or the temperature around the unit is a certain level Temperature increase limit over
110. T PECD in the screen below on a same line LINE1 is specified in the example below Lines 1 through 4 can be selected Line Configurati a TTT SFL DIMJ A Detector TTT BE FD DFID DTCD OO 10000000 H ati ANCE 2 Set the dual AFC 1 Press the FLOW key 2 Set Control mode as described below Flow CARS Control Mode d Single R T Risne M R Inlet PrefkPa R Col flow 5 5A Carrier gas type Hz Set to Single L when the column is connected to the left L side of the dual INJ and Single R when it is connected to the right R side GC 2014 45 46 EE GC 2014 A 29 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines a 1 Installation Location for Capillary Columns Injection ports and detectors for capillary columns can be installed in positions described in Table 4 1 1 and Fig 4 1 1 Injection ports and detectors that can be used for packed columns are included Table 4 1 Installation location for injection ports detectors for capillary columns Name Possible installation location SPL 1 4 Injection ports me 1 4 Dual INJ 1 2 2 3 3 4 Single INJ 1 4 Dual FID 6 7 Heiser Single DET 5 6 7 8 FTD 2014c 11 12 TCD 9 10 Installation location numbers indicate the positions of column connecting joints Fig 4 1 1 Installa
111. Temp B DFID Temp fi DTCD Temp B AUX3 Temp AURA Temp CAUKS Temp J Next Ch E When saving the background signal specify which signal 1 or 2 should be saved The currently set channel No is displayed Fig 16 6 8 Temperature control signal setup screen GC 2014 16 6 7 5 Selecting the flow signal Select the signal type from the main screen and then press FLOW to display the screen shown in Fig 16 6 9 Select the flow signal to be output Select the carrier gas detector gas and APC gas items The APC gas can be set when the APC is installed as an option in any location other than the flow controller or the detector gas E Carrier gas 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration If you select the carrier gas for the flow signal selection the screen shown in Fig 16 6 9 appears Select an item to be output from each area E Detector gas Channel 1 Signal Setting Det Sig Temp bienal Select Flow 1111111111 Carrier Gas Detector Gas APC Gas AMC Gas Primary Pre Pressure Total Flow Column Flow Linear Vel split Ratio Purge Press Purge Flow yl LINE DIMJ L DIMJ R LIE JReturn Next Ch sd Fig 16 6 9 Carrier gas signal setup screen The currently set channel No is displayed If you select the detector gas for the flow signal selection the screen shown in Fig 16 6 10 appears
112. The wait signal applies to all detectors configured in analytical lines NOTE User specified names are used in this screen 16 6 6 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reterence section Drift Set the baseline drift limit Ss GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 7 Parameter Configuration Signals are output from four gas chromatograph channels To assign detector channels see 13 Detector This section describes the detector signal configuration as well as the configuration of various other parameters which can be monitored on the screen 16 6 7 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 5 SIGNAL SETTING to display the signal settings screen shown in Fig 16 6 6 This screen allows you to adjust the GC signal parameters z e TE Use the cursor to select the desired channel Che DTCD Signal Press ENTER to open that Ch Hot get Ch4 Not get channel s setup screen Fig 16 6 6 Signal setup screen 16 6 7 2 PF menu gt PF menu Description Reference section Gain etc Sets the signal gain and offset for each detector 16 6 7 6 Sets the format of digital signals Data File When GC is linked to a personal computer this item is automatically set to en PC When link is ended this item automatically reverts to Chromatopac Sets signal output channels
113. Tm v 2 Start stop j Edit program A gC Start Stop v 3 Start GC Start Stop Second program 4 Time 19 00 Edit program Time hh mm is v 5 Start stop Edit program Program start Start Stop Other 6 Stop GC Start Stop v 7 Setting is completed f g P Time Function Value 1 07 00 Start GC 2 19 08 Stop GC 216 GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 1 Time Scheduler 16 1 11 Starting stopping a time schedule Select 3 START STOP from the time scheduler menu when no time schedule is executing to display the screen shown in Fig 16 1 6 Select 3 START STOP while a time schedule is executing to display the screen shown in Fig 16 1 7 Time schedule starts with FPFE It will start tomorrow with PFS schedule Ho PEZ schedule Ho Time schedule stops with Fig 16 1 6 Schedule start screen 16 1 12 PF menu Fig 16 1 7 Schedule stop screen PF menu Description Reference section Starts a time schedule This item is displayed when no time schedule is running If mode is set to number the same schedule will be executed on Start following day and beyond when schedule finishes If mode is set to day the schedule for the current day is executed and the schedule for each day will be executed on the following day and beyond
114. UX AMC CRG screens in this order AMC L Prege kPa Flow the Presa kPa Floto EEE 20 0 Ha Press kPa Flow the Fig 15 4 1 AUX AMC main screen GC 2014 207 15 Optional Devices 15 4 Setting the AUX AMC Parameters 15 4 2 Parameter list FLOW RATE Range 0 0 100 0 ml min Default 50 ml min Set the flow rate when the control mode is set to FLOW GAS TYPE Selecti on He N2 H2 Ar Default He Set the type of gas supplied to the AMC This parameter is used to calculate the flow rate 15 4 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Offset Performs offset calibration of AMC sensor to improve the reproducibility of results Next Toggles the screen among AOC parameters AUX temperature AUX 3 6 APC AUX AMC CRG screens in this order f On Off Set the AMC to be used to On Default is On 208 GC 2014 29 15 Optional Devices 1 5 5 Setting the CRG Parameters The CRG option allows temperatures below room temperature to be set The CRG can be connected to the column oven or the INJ2 15 5 1 Screen description Press the OPTION key from the OPTION key main screen or press NEXT PF menu until the CRG screen shown in Fig 15 3 1 appears The screen toggles among AOC parameters setting AUX temperature AUX APC gt AUX AMC CRG screens in this order Valve T CRG Not Us
115. UX5 relay error No 1048 Heater controller error No An error may have occurred in the control circuit Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Detector temperature setting error Code Message CS 1049 DET 1 set temp is low No 1050 DET 2 set temp is low No 1051 DET S3 set temp is low No 1052 DET 4 set temp is low No These messages appear when the Detector temperature setting value is smaller than that of the Oven Increase the Detector temperature To have the Detector temperature lower than the column oven temperature set No on Protection against contamination PF menu on the screen to set the maximum temperature on configuration setting 288 GC 2014 18 1 3 Pressure flow rate errors 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages Leaks Code Message CS 2005 CAR1 purge leaks Yes 2006 CAR2 purge leaks Yes 2007 CAR3 purge leaks Yes 2014 DetAPC1 makeup gas leaks Yes 2015 DetAPC1 hydrogen leaks Yes 2016 DetAPC1 air leaks Yes 2017 DetAPC2 makeup gas leaks Yes 2018 DetAPC2 hydrogen leaks Yes 2019 DetAPC2 air leaks Yes 2020 DetAPC3 makeup gas leaks Yes 2021 DetAPC3 hydrogen leaks Yes 2022 DetAPC3 air leaks Yes 2023 DetAPC4 makeup gas leaks Yes 2024 DetAPC4 hydrogen leaks Yes 2025 DetAPC4 air leaks Yes 2026 APC1 leaks Yes 2027 APC2 leaks Yes 2028 APC3 leaks Yes 2029 APC4 leaks Yes
116. a START TIME of approx 10 minutes If a different column is installed on the same flow line that has been in use set a START TIME of approx 10 minutes If the system has been out of use for a time with no column connected set a START TIME of 1 to several hours e GC 2014 87 29 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM s 4 Specifying the Stop Procedures 7 4 1 Screen Select Stop Seq PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen to display the stop procedure setup screen shown in Fig 7 4 1 Stop Seg is displayed only when the system is in OFF status The stop procedure setup screen consists of parameters equivalent to those on the SYSTEM key main screen when the GC is in system ON status except that the current file cannot be changed Parameter changes on the stop procedure setup screen are reflected on the SYSTEM key main screen GC Stop Sequence Stop GC Stop Program Stop Time mini o stop Temp Det Cont Sleep Time min Restart GC Off Fig 7 4 1 Setting the stop procedures 7 4 2 Parameter list STOP TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default 0 0 min Sets the period of time after Stop GC PF menu is pressed or after a program finishes if the program was running to stop temperature detector control The STOP TIME value on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here FLOW OFF TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default because the gas control is set to Cont Se
117. agnosis procedure Also check for gas leaks and verify the gas flow rates If set values are correct contact your Shimadzu representative Code Message CS 9012 COL sensor use time is over Yes 9013 INJ1 sensor use time is over Yes 9014 DET1 sensor use time is over Yes 9015 INJ2 sensor use time is over Yes 9016 DET2 sensor use time is over Yes 9017 AUX3 sensor use time is over Yes 9018 AUX4 sensor use time is over Yes 9019 AUX5 sensor use time is over Yes These messages appear when the sensor use time exceeds the preset value Component replacement and reset by a serviceperson are required Contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2014 301 These messages appear when the detector FID FPD cannot be ignited Check the detector s line configuration and set detector control and temperature control to On before ignition 302 E 60204 eee Code Message CS 9020 Temperature is not controlled No 9021 Detector is not controlled No 9022 FID FPD is not installed No gt 19 Index A Actual current values 69 AD CONVERTER 176 AFC 129 analysis counter 188 ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE 155 167 Analysis counter 188 Analysis log 183 AOC 195 AOC commands 275 APC 159 ATMOSPHERIC COMPENSATION 253 ATMOSPHERIC PRESS 175 AUTO IGNIT 80 Auto Injector 195 automatic ignition 156 automatic re ignition 156 AUX AMC 207 AUX APC 205 BACK LIGHT AUTO OFF 253 BACKGROUND SIG
118. ak detectors can also be used for hydrogen and helium leaks lt Option gt Snoop Gas leak detecting fluid P N 670 11514 Fig 1 3 7 Leak detecting fluid GC 2014 15 A gt 2 Before Use 1 Setting Analytical Flow Lines GC 2014 does not operate normally without setting analytical flow lines Always set analytical flow lines before using the unit Refer to Chapter 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines and Chapter 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines for detailed descriptions Setting analytical flow lines creates the following benefits during operation 1 Conditions of analytical parameters for each line can be set and monitored For example when the SET key of the gas chromatograph is pressed temperatures of columns injection ports and detectors as well as carrier gas flow rate can be set and monitored on a single screen A protective mechanism operates to foster more stable operation conditions For example when a carrier gas cylinder becomes empty while TCD is used the flow controller detects an error and automatically lowers the column temperature and stops conduction to the TCD filament in order to prevent damage to the column and TCD filament NOT READY 41 FILES nalyels Settings FILE OM Colum 0000000 Temp t G CP Foe Control Mode Dual L Inlet PreckPa ERG L Col flow NON R Inlet Preca Bana
119. al is always output with x1 SIGNAL ATTENUATION Selection x1 x2 1 x2 2 x2 3 x2 Default x2 1 Multiplies the analog signal by the coefficient 2 gt for a wide analog signal type If the data processing unit is saturated for example change the setting from x1 to x2 1 from x2 2 to x2 3 In case of the digital signal the signal is always output with x1 ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE Selection Linear Wide Default Linear Set this item when the GC is connected to a Chromatopac in analog format Wide Select Wide when connecting the GC to the C R8A C R7A C R7A plus The GC outputs square root of the original signals to the Chromatopac and the received signals are squared in the Chromatopac When connecting the GC to a C R7A CR 7A plus for the first time or replacing the Chromatopac set the detector signal output to Off and perform calibration For the calibration procedure refer to 2 2 Outputting Analog Signals to the Chromatopac Linear Select linear when connecting the GC to any Chromatopac other than the C R7A CR 7A plus When connecting the GC to the C R8A C R7A C R7A plus and setting the ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE to Linear the optional signal cable linear P N 221 47251 92 is required GC 2014 167 13 2 2 3 PF menu ipti Reference PF menu Description Sa Next Det Toggles to the setup screeen of another detector The DET key can also be used to switch screens n
120. allation 1 Fluctuating ambient temperature 2 Temperature changes from heating or air conditioning 3 Direct sunlight 4 Vibrations GC 2014 1 1 Installation 1 1 Verification of Installation Location E Installation clearances AM WARNING Hot air Hot air is exhausted from the vent Do not place flammable materials where they will be exposed to the heat Hot air is vented at the back of the unit when the column oven cools Consider the following during installation 1 Do not place flammable materials behind the unit 2 Allow aclearance of 400mm or more between the back cover and the wall 3 Allow a clearance of 50mm or more on the left side 4 Allow aclearance of 100mm or more on the right side in order to have a space to open close the oven door 5 Reserve extra space for maintenance and inspection behind the unit GC 2014 Height 690mm Depth 607mm L Width 400mm o Minimum 50mm Minimum 100mm NOTE When the optional exhaust air duct P N 221 70675 91 is used rear space of 200mm or more is required GC 2014 E Moving the GC Move the GC carefully so it does not get bumped or jarred 1 The GC weighs approximately 50kg GC 2014ATF 2 Two people must carry the GC one on the left and one on the right with their hands between the rubber legs on the left and right side of
121. and associated purity values are required to maintain the optimum performance of the unit For detectors other than FID and TCD refer to the instruction manual corresponding to each detector Gas types Carrier gas types Packed FID analysis Both helium and nitrogen can be used Nitrogen is more reasonable in terms of price Packed TCD analysis Using helium or hydrogen as carrier gas helps analyzing other materials at high sensitivity Because hydrogen is flammable helium is generally used for safety However to analyze helium or hydrogen use nitrogen or argon as carrier gas Nitrogen is convenient to analyze minor components in the air because the nitrogen peak is not detected when it is used as carrier gas Capillary analysis Helium is the most suitable for separation Although nitrogen which is more reasonable than helium can also be used the optimum separation conditions may not be reached Makeup gas types Capillary FID Both helium and nitrogen can be used Nitrogen has a slightly higher sensitivity Capillary TCD The same gas is used as makeup gas and reference gas for capillary TCD Select a type of gas by the same method to select carrier gas 2 Gas purity Helium carrier gas makeup gas 99 995 or higher Nitrogen carrier gas makeup gas 99 995 or higher Argon carrier gas makeup gas 99 995 or higher Hydrogen FID detector gas 99 995 or higher Air FID detector gas Dry air oil and other
122. and press Set PF menu AOC Priority Sample raparation Injection Sample on Fig 15 1 2 Priority analysis setup screen 15 1 5 Parameter list INJECTION SAMPLE INJECTION SAMPLE NUMBER NOTE Enter the sample vial No designated for priority analysis When an auto sampler carousel is not in use Short rack No 1 6 Long rack No 1 12 When an auto sampler corousel is installed No 1 150 maximum When an auto sampler carousel the allowable vial No range depends on the vial rack type and the number of racks A valve of 0 default indicates no priority sample 198 GC 2014 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 3 gt 15 1 6 PF menu Reference PF menu Description E section Set Analyzes the vial No specified after the analysis of the current sample is finished 15 1 7 Other AOC parameters Select OtherPara PF menu from the AOC main screen to display the other parameters screen shown in Fig 15 1 3 Specify options and AOC custom parameters READY Inactive c ai TTT Inj Speed Syringe lt gt Fasti Using 3 Solvent Vials _Yes Solvent Select All Air Suction to Plimger Suction Speed Fast speed of Flinger Fast Syringe Height Syringe Height Syringe Height Inj ulti Inj al Kinds of Viale 1 5m1 Return InjMode Fig 15 1 3 Additional AOC parameter setup GC 2014 199 15 Optio
123. ank gt amp gt Numeric mode Press the 0 to 9 keys to input numbers 0 to 9 Press the and keys to toggle the symbols 76 GC 2014 3 6 Basic Key Operation n 4 Getting Help The Help function describes items on the setup screens Understanding the items helps to quickly and efficiently set up analytical parameters and proceed analyses smoothly 6 4 1 Screen description If you do not know the meaning of an item on the screen press the HELP key on the screen to display the item and its description For example the screen shown in Fig 6 4 1 appears when the HELP key is pressed on the DIAG key screen Items which may be difficult to understand are linked to further descriptions Set the cursor on one of these underlined items and press Display PF menu to access to the linked descriptions Fig 6 4 2 shows the pop up screen linked to the word log on the screen shown in Fig 6 4 1 if each part of the equipment is operating without a problem The execubion of each test can be customized The result of this test is The operation of the equipment is recorded on the log Operation log The time record of the start and the stop Analysia log The time record of the Display recorded on the Mg analysis emp sensor use time Errors during the analysis are The accumulated time of each also recorded temperatu
124. are has failed The GC system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Room temperature sensor atmospheric pressure sensor error Code 0005 0006 CS No No Message Room temperature is out of range Atm pressure is out of range The room temperature or atmospheric pressure is out of the performance range If this error occurs even though the actual room temperature atmospheric pressure is within the range the sensors may have failed The system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2014 283 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages PCB failure Code Message CS 0007 DET 1 PCB error No 0008 DET 2 PCB error No 0009 DET 3 PCB error No 0010 DET 4 PCB error No 0011 CAR1 AFC PCB error No 0012 CAR2 AFC PCB error No 0013 Det APC1 PCB error No 0014 Det APC2 PCB error No 0015 Det APC3 PCB error No 0016 Det APC4 PCB error No 0023 APC 1 3 PCB error No 0024 APC 4 6 PCB error No 0025 APC 7 9 PCB error No 0026 APC 10 12 PCB error No 0027 APC 13 15 PCB error No 0028 APC 16 18 PCB error No If the above error messages appear the hardware has failed The GC system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Clock reset Code Message CS 0029 Clock is initialized No Th
125. arrier gas flowing in the capillary column GC 2014 147 148 12 Injection Port 12 3 Direct Injection System When you set the linear velocity the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter the length and the film thickness of the column The linear velos ity is set separately so that the linear velocity desired occurs at the initial temperature in the oven temperature program If you set the control mode to VELOCITY the column inlet pressure automatically changes so that the linear velocity remains constant during the oven temperature program TOTAL FLOW RATE Range 0 0 1200 0 ml min Refer to Fig 3 5 1 Default 50 0 ml min Set the total flow rate which is the sum of column flow rate split flow rate septum purge flow rate CONTROL MODE Selection PRESS VELOCITY FLOW Default PRESS PRESS Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant during an oven temperature program VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant during an oven temperature program FLOW Controls the system so that the set flow rate remains constant CARRIER GAS TYPE NOTE 1 Selection He N2 H2 Ar Default He Specify the carrier gas type supplied to the AFC This parameter is used for the measurement control of the flow rate If this parameter is set incorrectly flow rate calckulations may not be performed incorrectly Example I
126. as chromatograph to start the Chromatopac automatically Pressing the GC STOP key however does not stop the Chromatopac The STOP key of the Chromatopac needs to be pressed as well To prevent automatic start of Chromatopac refer to 16 6 9 Setting the link device code Key operation from the Chromatopac The gas chromatograph is not controlled by the Chromatopac Pressing the Chromatopac START or STOP key does not start or stop a GC analysis E When the gas chromatograph is linked to a personal computer pc Start analysis using the computer Control for both the gas chromatograph and computer is automatically stopped after a series of process is complete To inject a sample manually start analysis using the computer so that data can be taken in inject the sample and press the START key of the gas chromatograph To pause analysis use the computer to stop it 112 GC 2014 1 1 29 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program 1 COL Key Main Screen 11 1 1 Screen description Press the COL key to display the column screen shown in Fig 11 1 1 The oven temperature program is set from this screen Enter a value other than 0 in the rate field displayed with END Once a valid rate has been entered set the temperature final temp and time hold time for the line In addition to the oven temperature program the equilibration time is set from this screen Equilibration time is the length of time allowed for the ov
127. ate or the linear velocity GC 2014 133 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 12 2 4 Gas saver The gas saver function reduces the split ratio during a split of splitless analysis This reduces the amount of carrier gas flowing through the split flow line conserving carrier gas Even though this can change the split ratio the column inlet pressure is kept at a constant value In other words changing the split ratio does not affect the carrier gas flow rate through in the column 12 2 4 1 Screen description Select Gas Saver PF menu from the FLOW key to display the Gas Saver screen shown in Fig 12 5 6 Gas saver La Offi Split ratio 5 Time min 1 06 Fig 12 2 7 Gas saver setup screen 12 2 4 2 Parameter list GAS SAVER Selection On Off Default Off Select On to use the gas saver function Select Off to disable the gas saver function GAS SAVER SPLIT RATIO Range 0 0 9999 9 Default 5 0 Set the split ratio which will reduce the split flow to conserve carrier gas Setting 0 closes the split flow line GAS SAVER START TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Specify the period of time after analysis starts until the split ratio switches to gas saver mode This period of time should be longer than the time required for the sample to move from the injection port to the column Setting the gas saves start time too early can provide unpredictable quantitation re
128. ature clean up program Do not exceed the maximum column temperature CLEAN UP TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Sets the final temperature hold time for the clean up program E Clean up column Inlet pressure program when the AFC control mode is pressure The clean up pressure program consits of a single program ramp CLEAN UP RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 kPa Default END Sets the rate of column inlet pressure for the clean up program CLEAN UP PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 12 2 5 Default 0 0 kPa Sets the final pressure for the column inlet pressure clean up program CLEAN UP TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Sets the final pressure hold time for the clean up program E Clean up flowrate program when the DAFC and AFC control mode is flow rate The clean up total flow rate program consists of a single program ramp CLEAN UP RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 ml min2 Default END Sets the rate of total flow increase for the clean up program CLEAN UP FLOW RATE Range 0 0 100 0 ml min DAFC 0 0 1 200 0 ml min AFC refer to Fig 12 2 5 Default 50 0 ml min Set the final flow rate for the total flow rate clean up program 84 GC 2014 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters CLEAN UP TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Sets the final flow rate hold time for the clean up program 7 2 3 PF menu
129. ayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left and right arrow keys 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Deletes all displayed logs Clear Lo When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the 9 message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the the operation log to a Chromatopac A GC 2014 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 4 Analysis log When 2 ANALYSIS LOG is selected the analysis log is displayed This log records whether analyses were allowed to finish and whether monitored valves exceeded their set valves 1 Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from the DIAG key main screen then select 2 ANALYSIS LOG to display the screen shown in Fig 14 2 3 25 545 logs are saved The number of saved logs depends on the size of each log If the number of logs exceeds the capacity existing logs are deleted starting from the oldest Analysis Log Gra Start time Anal len Stat 03 11 18 32 15min 1 Fail Fe Print Fig 14 2 3 Analysis log screen NOTE During a temperature program if the rate of temperature increase is too great the GC may not be within the Ready range When this occurs the analysis log shows Fail NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left and right arrow key
130. be set The link device code specifies which GC channel should start when the GC START key is pressed 16 6 9 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 7 LINK DEVICE CODE to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 21 Link Device Code Channel to start Chi On Che On Ch3 ooff Ch4 Off Fig 16 6 21 Link device code setup screen 16 6 9 2 Parameter list CHANNEL TO START Ch1 Ch4 Selection On Off Default On Set Or or Off for the start signal of each channel 250 GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 3 gt 16 6 10 Temperature offset If the actual temperature of the various heated zones as measured by a thermocouple differs flow the set temperature set a temperature offset value to compensate 16 6 10 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key and select 8 TEMPERATURE OFFSET to display the temperature offset screen shown in Fig 16 6 22 emperature Offset Column 1 60 SPL Hie a aa DINJ a Be DFID ne a Ae DTCD 0 oe Fig 16 6 22 Offset set up screen 16 6 10 2 Parameter list COLUMN INJ1 INJ2 DET1 DET2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 Range 10 00 10 00 Default 0 00 The temperature of each heated zone can be offset Uninstalled ports are not displayed For example when 1 C is obtained by subtracting the column oven temperature measured by thermoco
131. by baking in the GC oven at 250 C with 30mL min carrier gas purging the filter Capacity Approx 200mL Absorbent Molecular sieve 5A Fig 1 3 5 Gas filter GC 2014 13 E Gas chromatograph tubing connections Connections are provided on the rear panel of the unit for connecting external tubing They are labeled as follows Carrier gas aaae CARRIER L and R mean the left and right side of dual INJ Makeup gas 0 cee MAKE UP Hydrogen nsee HYDROGEN A en AIR Flow controller for the dual FID Right Left L AFC for SPL AFC for the dual INJ Supply the carrier gas for the left inlet of the dual INJ to CARRIER L and the carrier gas for the right inlet of the dual INJ to CARRIER R Fig 1 3 6 Plumbing Example of the GC 2014ATF SPL model 14 GC 2014 1 Installation 1 3 Gas Supply Plumbing 3 gt E Checking for gas leaks After plumbing the unit check for gas leaks according to the following guidelines 1 Open the main valve of the gas cylinder 2 Adjust the gas supply to the specified pressures 3 Check for leaks with leak detecting fluid option or soapy water on all connections Bubbles can be observed if a leak exists 4 Ifa leak is detected Further tighten the connection or retighten it e Replace the seal material 5 Wipe off the leak detecting fluid or soapy water using a wet cloth Electronic le
132. c prss out of range No 5057 APC9 calc prss out of range No 5058 APC10 calc prss out of range No 5059 APC11 calc prss out of range No 5060 APC12 calc prss out of range No 5061 APC13 calc prss out of range No 5062 APC 14 calc prss out of range No 5063 APC15 calc prss out of range No 5064 APC16 calc prss out of range No 5065 APC17 calc prss out of range No 5066 APC18 calc prss out of range No 5067 PUR calc prss out of range No 5068 PUR2 calc prss out of range No 5069 PUR3 calc prss out of range No The pressure calculated from the flow rate you have input is outside the set range Change the conditions and enter a new value Overflow of calculated pressure value during a linear velocity program Code Message CS 5070 CAR1 calc prss out of range No 5071 CAR2 calc prss out of range No 5072 CAR3 calc prss out of range No The carrier gas pressure calculated from the linear velocity you have input is outside the set range Change the conditions and enter a new value Overflow of calculated flow rate value in programs Code Message cs 5073 CAR1 calc flow out of range No 5074 CAR2 calc flow out of range No 5075 CAR1 calc ratio out of range No 5076 CAR2 calc ratio out of range No 5077 CAR1 calc flow out of range No 5078 CAR2 calc flow out of range No The carrier gas total flow rate calculated from the split ratio program you have input is outside t
133. c and symbols To customize the name refer to 6 3 5 Changing item names in 5 3 Basic Key Operations Name Cuetomization Heater Name Customiz Carrier Name Customiz AUX APC Name Customiz EN AUX AMC Name Customiz E Relay Name Customiz select function PJretun Fig 16 6 14 Name setup screen 16 6 8 2 Customization example If the Heater Name and Carrier Name are customized the Line Configuration screen changes as shown in Fig 16 6 15 Line Configuration UW Injector TTT rota AGA SPLADOA using Carrier Name Customiz AFO FY lt There is no injection port in de e INJ2 and th i I The INJ2 and DET1 names A Detector 00000000000 plena tna were changed from Heater w pe DFIDEGS E N Customiz a EA A 100000000 AGCL AQCE Jretun Fig 16 6 15 Name customization example 246 GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration gt 16 6 8 3 Heater Name Customization Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION and finally select 1 HEATER NAME CUSTOMIZ to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 16 Only listed heated zone names can be changed To change the names refer to 6 3 5 Changing item names in 6 3 Basic Key Operations
134. cal Parameters and File Management 8 1 SET Key Main Screen 8 1 2 Parameter list e COLUMN OVEN e Flow Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 25 0 C Sets the default temperature in the oven temperature program When the packed INJ DAFC is used L inlet pressure R inlet pressure Column inlet pressures are indicated L left side R right side L column flow rate R column flow rate Range 0 0 100 0 ml min Default 50 ml min Enter the column flow rate Set the initial flow rate to set a flow rate program When the control mode is set to Single L or Single R only the specified side is displayed When the SPL etc AFC is used INLET PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 12 2 5 Default 100 0 kPa Sets the column inlet pressure The initial pressure must be set in order to create a pressure program When the control mode is set to pressure the system keeps the column inlet pressure at a constant value while the oven temperature program is running COLUMN FLOW RATE Default 1 1 00 ml min Sets the carrier gas flow rate at the capillary column exit atmospheric pressure at 25 C When you set the carrier gas flow rate the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter and the length of the column The column flow rate is set separately so that the carrier gas flow rate desired occures at the initial temperature in the oven temperature program LINEAR VELOCITY Defaul
135. cates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided AN WARNING could result in moderate to serious injury or possibly death Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided AN CAUTION may result in minor injury or equipment damage Emphasizes additional information that is provided to ensure the NOTE proper use of this instrument H gt Contents About this USER s MANUAL 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 5 1 GC 2014 Installation Verification of Installation Location 0 0c eee tee 1 Power supply and wiring ooocoooooocr eee 4 Gas Supply Plumbing oooococccr eee eee eee 7 Before Use Setting Analytical Flow Lines 00 00 cece eee 17 Outputting Analog Signals to the Chromatopac 000 e cece e eee 20 Outputting Digital Signals to a Personal Computer 000 ee eee eee 23 Connecting a RS 232C Cable to the Chromatopac C R8A ooooooo 25 Connecting Auto Injector Auto Sampler AOC 20 Series o ooo 27 Connecting the Relay Terminals 00 00 cece eee eee 29 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines Installation Location for Packed Columns 000 cece e eee e eee eens 31 Dual Column Packed FID Analysis 000 cece eee eee eee eee eee 33 Single Column Packed FID Analysis 00 cece e eee eee eee eee 36 Packed TCD A
136. ce section Sets inner diameter length and film thickness of a column used Column Values entered here are simply for notes and they are not used for flow 12 1 3 rate calculations Set the flow controller to be used to On On Off When the GC starts the AFC in the current analytical line which is set to be Or is controlled L Flow prog Sets the flow rate program for the flow controller on the left inlet da R Flow prog Sets the flow rate program for the flow controller on the right inlet a Offset Performs offset calibration of the AFC sensor This calibration contributes 12 4 to good reproducibility of results Toggles among the AFC set up screens when two or more AFCs are Next Flow installed in the system The FLOW key can also be used to switch E screens GC 2014 3 gt 123 124 12 Injection Port 12 1 Packed Column Injection Port Dual INJ 12 1 3 Entering Columns Parameters Set values for column dimensions are not used for calculation for controlling the dual AFC Values entered here are simply for notes 12 1 3 1 Screen description Select Column PF menu on the FLOW key main screen to display the screen shown in Fig 12 1 4 Column Diam CARS 01 1 Less Dimensions of a column L Column i d mm a 32 connected to the left inlet L Column length m on a L Film thicknesa um A 5A T Risne 10000000 Dimensions of a column R Colum i d mm 1 32 connected to
137. cks that the ROM is intact RAM Verifies whether the RAM can be correctly written and read GC 2014 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis 14 1 5 Starting the diagnosis Press Start Diag PF menu from the standard diagnosis main screen shown in Fig 14 1 1 to start diagnosis and to display the screen shown in Fig 14 1 3 Standard Diagnosis Diagnosing Reset IC Progress KE Reset IC will be checked Fress PFZ key The syetem ig reget and the diagnosis continues stop Diag Fig 14 1 3 Starting the Diagnosis 14 1 6 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Stops the diagnosis Stop Diag If the program is stopped items not yet executed are canceled i Before stariting the IC diagnosis the message Reset IC will be checked Reset Press PF2 key appears Press Reset PF menu to check whether reset IC is functioning normally GC 2014 3 gt 177 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis 14 1 7 Stopping exiting the diagnosis Press Stop Diag PF menu during diagnosis to display the diagnosis stop screen shown in Fig 14 1 4 When the diagnostics are allowed to complete the total diagnosis results Test Result and the number of abnormalities Number of NG are displayed Standard Diagnosis Test Result Hot Good The diagnosis is terminated Fig 14 1 4 Diagnosis stops 14 1 8 PF menu PF menu Description Re
138. ction is a split splitless injection method which keeps the column inlet pressure at a value higher than the analysis pressure for a specified period of time while the sample is injected Then the column inlet pressure returns to the normal analysis value High pressure injection is effective especially for the splitless injection system High pressure injections can reduce the total gas volume and improve percent recovery valves E Splitter Fix If the injected sample consists of a solvent with a high vaporization expansion coefficient the pressure inside the injection port drastically increases when the solvent vaporizes This can result in too much solvent being diverted from the column reducing sensitivity Sending power to the split flow valve at sample injection can keep the split ratio at its desig nated valve 12 2 9 1 Screen description Select Advanced PF menu from the FLOW key main screen when not in DIRECT mode to open the advanced screen shown in Fig 12 2 16 Advanced CAR Sm Ey O High Pes Ing WIM High press inj mode 4_0 High prs inj press kPar 106 0 High pre inj timetmin 1 00 O Splitter Fiz 111111 splitter Fix Mode oft Fix Time min 1 00 Fig 12 2 16 Setup screen for high pressure injection and splitter fix mode GC 2014 gt 143 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 12 2 9 2 Parameter list E High Pressure Injection HIGH PRESS INJECTION MODE Se
139. cus weet ok ee ok vite eee A teat ie eae das es 74 6 3 4 Changing a selection cios paki tacks Ged ia is eo deer eee be ie 74 6 3 5 CHANGING ULSIM MAINO cl e A Rc OE Sse bg gy aon Phas RO a aca tee Metals Aha rie nt 75 Getting Help 0 4 E Sone een o eee ee ee oe Sc pa nee ia 77 6 4 1 Screen description viure md andadas ed ge aba 77 6 4 2 PF MENU at e Fs eee eg hee oak ot Vai aan eee ate ann a A Sa A oe 77 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM SYSTEM Key Main Screen 2 02 cee eee 79 7 1 1 Screen Description eredm daaa e ee we dpi 79 7 1 2 Parameter anita SAO Sie A A aed tk oh Ste Pee otis alk Be ad El acs 80 7 1 3 PR MON spa mer Satan ea dea AA GE See ee hale ata Hae Ane ee anand a 81 Specifying Clean Up Parameters oocoooocccoccnn eee 82 7 2 1 Sereen Description se SO forte ie co te rca Meas he te aden ira tis i 82 7 2 2 Parameter listero tiet Scene a A arene Bop Oy Gade ore Ae Secs ee one 83 7 2 3 PF Menus hair etd peace ase by er tbe Maal ince tan ate ay atte ob ai MS aa aus nea ee 85 Specifying Start Procedures 2 2 0 cece eee ee 86 7 3 1 SCLESNAGESSCHIPUION ce caste ke it ss Wo odes da 86 7 3 2 Parameter liste ianya A dogg tae Wed naan reer eae a ed 87 7 3 3 Example starting the system with carrier gas flow a asana naana cece eee eee 87 Specifying the Stop Procedures 200 e eee eee eee 88 7 4 1 Screen einn e A A A sath A Od hie Bek ARE ke E a8 88 7 4 2 Parameter list ener ia
140. d UNIT keys Displays the setup screen for the zone indicated on the key HELP key Explains currently displayed items STATUS Indicates the status of TEMP the entire GC the FLOW lamp heater and the flow controller respectively SYSTEM Starts stops the GC key DIAG key Executes and allows diagnosis settings PF key Selects PF programmable functions displayed at the bottom of the screen Toggle key Toggles among PF items displayed Toggle key Sets On Off of backlight and adjustment of Cursor contrast keys Cursor Moves the cursor up keys down left and right respectively Numeric Inputs numeric values keys ENTER Validates input or key selection CE key Clears a numeric input or error GC 2014 67 6 Basic Key Operation 6 1 Keypad Description and Operation 6 1 1 Keypad operation The keypad is used to operate the system and make parameter settings The table below shows the function of each key Name Function START key Starts the temperature program pressure flow rate program and time program If a Pre Run program is set the Pre Run program starts STOP key Stops the program DIAG key Performs unit self diagnosis Also used for maintenance functions such as confirmation of various logs part replacement status and standard s
141. e Fig 15 5 1 CRG main screen NOTE If the CRG is turned off after a negative temperature valve has been set the temperature cannot be achieved and the GC cannnot become ready When turning off the CRG ensure that the temperature valve is set properly GC 2014 209 210 15 Optional Devices 15 5 Setting the CRG Parameters 15 5 2 Parameter list COLUMN OVEN VALVE Selection On Off Default Off CRG INJ 2 Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use When the CRG is connected to the column oven the column oven temperature control range is extended to 99 0 400 0 C from room temperature 4 C 400 0 C When using the CRG set VALVE to On and CRG to Use When using valve control only set VALVE to On and set CRG to Not Use VALVE Selection On Off Default Off CRG Selection Use Not Use Default Not Use When the PTV is installed on INJ2 the injection port temperature control range is extended to 99 0 400 0 C from 0 0 400 0 C When using the CRG set VALVE to On and CRG to Use When using valve control only set VALVE to On and set CRG to Not Use 15 5 3 PF menu GC 2014 PF menu Description Reference section Next Toggles the screen among AOC parameters AUX temperature gt AUX APC AUX AMC gt CRG screens in this order 3 16 Special Functions As 1 Time
142. e built in clock has been reset As a result other saved parameters may have changed Check the configuration installation and flow rate settings Initialize the parameters or reset them if necessary If the same message is displayed repeatedly the hardware has failed The GC system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative A D converter failure feedback loop communication error Code Message CS 0030 COL A D conv error No 0031 INJ1 DET2 A D error No 0032 AUX3 AUX5 A D error No 0033 Loop back test error No If the above error messages appear the hardware has failed The GC system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Low voltage of CPU board battery Code Message cs 0034 Battery voltage error No The battery on CPU board is dead It must be replaced Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative 284 GC 2014 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages gt Cooling fan error Code Message cs 0035 Cooling fan error No The GC cooling fan is out of order The system cannot perform fully in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Damaged in electronics Code Message CS 0036 ROM error No 0037 RAM error No 0038 CPU register error No A repair is necessary Contact your
143. e linear velocity is set to a value a little less than 10 cm s However nitrogen is not a good carrier gas for capillary analysis for the following reasons 1 If the linear velocity deviates only slighty from the optimum value the HETP increases dramatically 2 To obtain the optional linear velocity the flow rate must be low resulting in long analysis times Helium is frequently used as the carrier gas because the HETP is low over a considerably wider linear velocity range starting at 20 cm s The column efficiency of hydrogen is good at higher linear velocities than for helium For this reason hydrogen can be used for rapid analyses However hydrogen is seldom used in reality because it is extremely flammable and therfore too dangerous E Efficiency of an analysis Usually analyses are performed with a flow rate that is higher than the optimal flow rate as long as separation of conpounds is sufficient This reduces the analysis time For general analyses on this system setting the linear velocity to 30 cm s is recommended The tables below show the column inlet pressure at which the linear velocity becomes approximately 30 cm s Use the tables as the guideline for setting the column inlet pressure However the inlet pressure also depends on the column type GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 5 Setting the Flow Rate Parameters Example 1 Column oven temperature 50 C carrier gas helium
144. e printed The AOC2 parameters can be printed when an AOC2 is configured in the analytical line All printed items are listed by command name To match command names to screen items refer to 17 2 AOC commands AOC PARAMETER AOC1 AOC2 WRPT 2 2 WMOD 1 1 REPT 1 1 IVOL 1 0 1 0 WPRS 0 0 PUMP 5 5 WTPP 0 2 0 2 WAIT 0 0 0 0 ISPD 2 2 SSPD SAND 0 0 SOLV 0 0 SINT 0 0 SSNO 0 0 SNO2 0 0 AAIR 0 0 USPD 2 2 DSPD 2 2 HIGH 0 0 LOWS 0 0 Fig 17 1 2 Main parameters Press Print PF menu from the SET key to print the temperature valves for all heated zones the CAR1 2 pressure value and the total flow rate value from the current file GC PARAMETER O FILEO COLUMN OVEN TEMP 25 0 INJ1 TEMP 25 0 DET1 TEMP 25 0 INJ1 PRESS 100 0 INJ1 FLOW 50 0 END Fig 17 1 3 17 1 2 4 Time program and Pre Run program The time programs and Pre Run programs can be printed as Event No or parameter names To match Event No and parameter names to screen items refer to 17 3 Program Parameters and 17 4 Event No NOTE For all functions treated as events in the printout the line No is displayed as 0 regardless of the line number GC TIME PROGRAM TIME FUNC VALUE LINE 0 0 EVNT 91 0 0 2 0 D1RG 1 0 1 3 0 D1RG 0 0 1 200 0 STOP 1990 0 0 END Fig 17 1 4 17 1 2 5 Batch schedule Press Print PF menu to print the bach schedule as shown below GC SAMPLE S
145. e split ratio program is used for more general purposes 12 2 7 1 Screen description Select Split Prog PF menu from the FLOW key main screen when not in DIRECT mode to display the Split Ratio screen shown in Fig 12 2 12 plit Ratio CARL Hye A FILES Sprit ratio monitor Program total min Time min Split Ratio Init 50 1 lat a a END A program can contain up to 7 ramps Fig 12 2 12 Split ratio program setup screen 12 2 7 2 Parameter list TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Set this parameter to display the split ratio used previously in the Split Ratio column SPLIT RATIO Range 1 0 0 0 9999 9 Default 1 0 Set the split ratio If the split ratio is set to 1 0 the total flow rate remains constant regardless of the oven temperature 12 2 7 3 PF menu PF menu Description paella Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position o Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position Print Prints the split ratio through to a Chromatopac A GC 2014 139 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 12 2 7 4 Setting a split ratio program E Screen terminology lt 1 ramp program gt Split ratio Program Program Time starts finishes E Program creation lt 1 ramp program gt Split ratio 60 5 00min Split ratio 50 Initial ratio SPLIT ss S1 Initial program run time
146. ear key Clears the current numeric value CE key Clears display and alarm during an error ENTER key Validates parameter input or item selection GC 2014 6 1 2 Screen 6 Basic Key Operation 6 1 Keypad Description and Operation The areas of the 16 line screen display a variety of items These items are divided by lines on the screen If all items cannot be displayed on one screen line Scroll through the screen by moving the cursors A and V are displayed in the message Monitor Main ALRE BA Be P 156 60 Hi Za BkPa 30 0 38min 1000 Signal 1 00 04 40 150 66 xl H E RemainTime st 9 08mi l Col Temp amp Fetention Time PL RS Batten A Temp o zero Adj OS a ee OO S Monitor Main Displays the screen 2000 06 13 Tue 17 43 51 title and the GC 150 08 159 08 status READY 100 0 1p NOT READY or E ous Ou RUN etc RemainTime a eat 8 Omin 32000 Sisnali Displays a message or error about the OGAtten e specdg D croll lt Operating procedure ChngGraphiChng Line a When the DINJ is used E Return PF menu When the SPL is used Fig 6 1 1 Displays the menu selected by the PF key Return PF menu displayed in the PF menu line returns the display to the previous screen Return PF menu is displayed
147. ed the AOC HSS starts After sample is injected GC starts GC starts AOC HSS starts After the Pre Run program stops clean up starts Clean up After clean up finishes the system becomes ready NOTE 16 4 4 16 4 5 In the following case AUTO of the STOP parameter is carried out when the pre run program is fin ished There is no STOP parameter in the pre run program e Running the Batch Schedule Editing a Pre Run program To change the contents of the existing Pre Run program move the cursor using the A and V keys to the program line to be edited and press the ENTER key To change only the time enter the new time from the edit screen and press Finish PF menu To change the other parameters move the cursor and make the changes from the edit screen and then press Finish PF menu To cancel the edits and restore the original time program press Cancel PF menu before pressing Finish PF menu After Pre Run program is finished When the Pre Run program is finished certain events automatically return to their pre programs status These events are listed below Event No Description 131 134 Turn detector controller on off 141 146 Turn carrier gas and septum purge on off 147 158 Turn detector gas on off 171 Turns high pressure injection on off 181 198 Turn AUX APC on off 201 210 Turn AUX AMC on off For details
148. en temperature to properly equili brate before the system is Ready Column Up to 20 temperatue increase y 0 FILEO decrease ramps can be set Temp Monit E 50 0 Temp program total min 2 00 Rate Sa Tempi Time min Init gt 60 1 2 Be Equilibration Time min 3 8 Del Line Ine Line Fan Off Fig 11 1 1 COL key main screen NOTE Press the COL key to move the cursor directly to the temperature portion of the ramp This facilitates program edits when only the temperature needs to be changed GC 2014 113 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program 11 1 COL Key Main Screen 11 1 2 Parameter list TEMP Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the initial and the final temperature for each ramp of in the oven temperature program The column oven temperature should never exceed the maximum operating temperature of the column Keep the column temperature as low as possible to prolong the column life and reduce detector noise To set the maximum over temperature refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits N CAUTION Never increase the column oven temperature while air oxygen is mixed with the carrier gas This can damage the column especially for polar columns TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 0 00 min Set the hold time for the initial temperature and the final temperature for each stage of the oven temperature program RATE Range EN
149. er the new time from the edit screen and press Finish PF menu To change the other parameters move the cursor and make the changes from the edit screen and then press Finish PF menu To cancel the edits and restore the original time program press Cancel PF menu before pressing Finish PF menu 228 GC 2014 16 3 7 Time program setup example Example 1 When both positive and negative peaks appear on the chromatogram Four minutes after the program execution starts the polarity of the detector DET 1 TCD is switched from plus to minus Two minutes later six minutes after the 16 Special Functions 16 3 Time Program program execution starts the polarity is switched back to plus First program 1 Time 4 0 min v 2 Detector v 3 Polarity v 4 DET 1 5 minus Second program 6 Time 6 0 min v 7 plus v 8 The time program is set up Screen display Edit program Time min 4 08 Edit program Polarity A TCDS TCDe Polarity db Steps 2 4 are repeated Edit program Time min 6 08 TED Polarity gece Time min Function Value 1 4 TCDS Polarity_ _ 2 6 88 TCD Polarity_ _ GC 2014 gt 229 230 16 Special Functions 16 3 Time Program Example 2 Two AOC analyses use File No 0 then file No 1 is used The execution time is set to 30 min 1 Time 30 min 2 St
150. erature setup screen 16 6 4 2 Parameter list COLUMN Range 0 0 420 0 C Default 400 0 C In order to protect the column do not allow the maximum oven temperature to exceed the maximum column temperature INJ1 DET1 DET2 Range 10 0 420 0 C Default 420 0 C INJ2 Range 0 0 420 0 C Default 420 0 C AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 Range 10 0 420 0 C Default 420 0 C AUX3 AUX4 and AUX5 are available optionally If the are installed the AUX temperature control unit P N 221 48458 91 is required 16 6 4 3 PF menu list PF menu Description Reference chapter Protect Protection against contamination aene Selection Yes No Default Yes When Yes is selected the Detector temperature setting value must be bigger than or equal to the Oven temperature setting value When No is selected the Detector temperature setting value may be smaller than the Oven temperature setting value GC 2014 237 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 5 Setting transmission parameters 16 6 5 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 3 TRANSMISSION PARAMETER to display the Transmission Parameter screen shown in Fig 16 6 4 ranemlselon Parameter Protocol Nonel Baud Ratelbpe 260 Stop Bit 1bit Parity NONE Fig 16 6 4 Transmission parameter setup screen 16 6 5 2 Parameter list PROTOCOL Selection None LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 Default LEVEL2 BAUD RAT
151. etting the flow rate 12 3 2 1 Screen description Press the FLOW key to display the main Flow Screen shown in Fig 12 3 3 Set the AFC parameters to control the carrier gas pressure and the flow rate WEI 2 Inlet press REM 20 0 Inlet press Pa Ea Column flow E 7 51 Total flow s Aa 10 0 Linear vel ej 56 8 Control mode FLOW Total flow s4 ME Carrier gas type He Control mode PRESS Carrier gas type He Fig 12 3 3 FLOW key main screen 12 3 2 2 Parameter list INLET PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Default 100 0 kPa Set the column inlet pressure When creating a pressure program this specifies the initial pressure When the control mode is set to PRESS the system controls the column inlet pressure so that it remains constant during a temperature program Normally when using a wide bore column set the column inlet pressure to a low pressure 20 40 kPa COLUMN FLOW RATE Default Refer to NOTE 1 1 00 ml min Set the carrier gas flow rate at the capillary column exit atmospheric pressure at 25 C When you set the carrier gas flow rate the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter the length and the film thickness of the column The col umn flow rate is set separately so that the carrier gas flow rate desired occurs at the ini tial temperature in the oven temperature program LINEAR VELOCITY Default Refer to NOTE 2 30 0 cm s Set the average linear velocity of the c
152. f this parameter is set to N2 when He is actually used the displayed total flow rate column flow rate and linear velocity are lower than the actual values The column flow rate ranges is from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less and the calculated total flow rate is 1 200 ml min or less The linear velocity ranges is from O to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less 12 3 2 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Sets inner diameter length and film thickness of capillary column Values set here are used in column inlet pressure caluculations from Column column flow rate or linear velocity or vice versa 12 2 3 If these parameters are not set correctly calculations are not performed correctly On Off Set the flow controller to be used to On When the GC starts the AFC in the current analytical line which is set to be On is controlled Press Prog Sets the column inlet pressure program 1225 FLOW Prog Sets the total flow rate program 12 2 6 Purge Sets the septum purge flow rate 12 2 8 Offset Performs offset calibration of the AFC sensor 12 4 This calibration contributes to good reproducibility of results Toggles among the AFC setup screens if two or more AFCs are installed in Next Flow this system The FLOW key can also be used to Switch screens GC 2014 3 12 Injection Port
153. g 13 1 6 Setting starting procedures automatic ignition 2 Start the GC GC starts when Start GC PF menu is pressed in manual starting and when the power is turned on in automatic starting GC 2014 gt 161 13 Detector gt 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID 3 After the GC starts gas control starts Temperature detector control starts after the start time passes When the detector s temperature becomes READY the FID is ignited automatically E Manual ignition The FID is ignited by key operation 1 Press the SYSTEM key and set the following parameters Change other parameters if necessary START TEMP DET Yes DETECTOR On AUTO IGNITE Off sequence Next Time 1 FILEA File Load A FILER Manual Start Manual Start When next power on ee Start Flow a My Start Tine mi Start Temp Det Yes Start Temp Det Yes Detector On Reteetar n SAO dente ats Auto ignite4p_ Off Clean Up Clean Up i Off Stand Ey a Main screen b Start Seq PF menu Fig 13 1 7 Setting starting procedures manual ignition 2 Start the GC GC starts when Start GC PF menu is pressed in manual starting and when the power is turned on in automatic starting 3 After the GC starts gas control starts Temperature detector control starts after the start time passes 4 After the detector s temperature becomes 100 C or higher press Ignite PF menu on t
154. g 14 1 1 Standard Diagnosis The standard diagnosis starts with PFZ Before the standard diagnosis the system turns off Fig 14 1 1 Diagnosis main screen 14 1 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Start Diag Starts standard diagnosis program 14 1 5 Displays result of the most recent diagnosis However if standard diagnosis has not been executed since the power has 14 1 9 Details been turned on default values are displayed Print PF menu prints out the displayed diagnosis results Diag Param Determines setup values used for diagnostic reference and selects 14 1 3 diagnosis items GC 2014 173 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis 14 1 3 Diagnosis Parameters Press Diag Param PF menu from the Standard Diagnosis main screen to display the Diagnosis Parameters screen shown in Fig 14 1 2 Select the items to be checked during the self test Diagnosis Parameters NOT READY Counter for Septum Yes Counter for Insert Yes CRG Use Time Ho Temp Sensor Dias Yes LCI Use Time Yes Fan Use Time Yes DC Voltage Yes Room Tempetatire _No Atmospheric Press 4 gt _Ho Primary Press Yes CPU Registbor Yes Real Time Clock Registor Yes Fig 14 1 2 Diagnosis setup screen 174 GC 2014 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis gt 14 1 4 Diagnosis parameter list For each item specify whether it is to be checked or tested Test items are marked Ye
155. ge PRIMARY PRESS Verifies whether the gas supply pressure is within the maximum set pressure CPU REGISTER REAL TIME CLOCK REGISTER Verifies that each register is correctly written and read DETECTOR ROM Verifies that the data saved in the detector ROM is read correctly DETECTOR ADC REGISTER Verifies that the data saved in the detector A D converter register is read correctly DETECTOR HV SOURCE Verifies whether the detector high voltage power supply is within the threshold GC 2014 175 176 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis DETECTOR IGNITE Checks that the ignition pulse is normal DETECTOR IGNITION Verifies whether the ignition operation is normally executed ECD FREQUENCY Verifies whether the frequency of the pulse voltage applied to the ECD is below the limit CARRIER GAS ROM DETECTOR GAS ROM APC ROM AMC ROM Verifies whether the data saved in the ROM on the flow controller PCB can be read correctly CARRIER GAS AD CONVERTER DETECTOR AD CONVERTER APC AD CONVERTER AMC AD CONVERTER Verifies whether the contents of the A D converter on the flow controller PCB can be read correctly GAS CONTROL Checks if carrier gas detector gas AUX APC and AUX AMC are normally controlled OVER TEMP PROTECTION Ensure that the overheat protection circuit is normal CPU PERIPHERAL RESET IC Verifies that the reset circuit works normally WATCH DOG TIMER Ensures that the IC which checks for software problems is functioning normally ROM Che
156. ge No 5021 MUP4 calc prss out of range No 5022 HGN4 calc prss out of range No 5023 AIR4 calc prss out of range No 5024 APC1 calc prss out of range No 5025 APC2 calc prss out of range No 5026 APC3 calc prss out of range No 5027 APC4 calc prss out of range No 5028 APC5 calc prss out of range No 5029 APC6 calc prss out of range No 5030 APC7 calc prss out of range No 5031 APC8 calc prss out of range No 5032 APC9 calc prss out of range No 5033 APC10 calc prss out of range No 5034 APC11 calc prss out of range No 5035 APC12 calc prss out of range No 5036 APC13 calc prss out of range No 5037 APC 14 calc prss out of range No 5038 APC15 calc prss out of range No 5039 APC16 calc prss out of range No 5040 APC17 calc prss out of range No 5041 APC18 calc prss out of range No 5042 PUR1 calc prss out of range No 5043 PUR2 calc prss out of range No 5044 PUR3 calc prss out of range No 5045 MUP1 calc prss out of range No 5046 MUP2 calc prss out of range No 5047 MUP3 calc prss out of range No 5048 MUP4 calc prss out of range No 5049 APC1 calc prss out of range No 5050 APC2 calc prss out of range No 5051 APC3 calc prss out of range No 5052 APC4 calc prss out of range No 5053 APC5 calc prss out of range No 5054 APC6 calc prss out of range No 298 GC 2014 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages gt Code Message CS 5055 APC7 calc prss out of range No 5056 APC8 cal
157. gital transmission 1 Start digital transmission 1 Type OPEN TRS 8 using the C R8A keyboard and press the Enter key 2 The transmission port will open and transmission between the GC and C R8A will start NOTE To turn OFF the power of the GC or Chromatopac after opening the transmission port type CLOSE TRS 8 using the C R8A keyboard and press the Enter key 26 GC 2014 gt 2 Before Use gt 5 Connecting Auto Injector Auto Sampler AOC 20 Series Connecting the GC 2014 and the auto injector auto sampler power source unit using an AOC RS 232C cable allows AOC parameters to be set using the GC s keyboard Refer to AOC 20 user s manual for details about AOC 20 E Cable connections Connect the READY START cable attached to the AOC built in power source and the AOC RS 232C cable to the connectors on the back of the GC Fig 2 5 1 Connect the AOC power cable to the connector on the back of the GC and the auto injector or auto sampler NOTE There are two identical RS 232C connectors Make sure to make the correct connections READY START cable Wire the cables according to the Scan numbers on them Press the buttons on the terminal when E 7 inserting or removing cables E Back of the GC q al Button Cable inlet ls
158. gs To make changes to the COL FLOW INJ and DET parameters the customiz PF menu key is pressed Changes to these parameters are reflected in the SET key main screen The screen shows parameters of a line that consists of an injection port detectors and options connected to a column two columns for the dual packed column INJ The combina tion can be changed on the Line Config PF menu sub screen When the system is turned on the temperatures are controlled for the components in the flow line If the AFC is present carrier gas is supplied to the injection port specified If APC is present detector gases are supplied to the detector specified Temperatures are not con trolled and gases are not supplied to components which are not part of the analytical flow line Although two or more detectors can be set for a line only one injection port can be set Analysie Settings dE a FILES DA Colum Over A Temp to a A Flow NT L Inlet Pre kPs EN L Col flow s Temp to LineConfg Customiz Analysie Settings dE a FILE OT Column oven M Temp itd Ma os TU FL oor na Inlet press kPa 100 0 Column flow s 3 21 split ratio A Split mode SPLIT A THI SEE Temp itd Rome 150 6 OT DET DETE M Temp iti SN 150 0 Line tonfg Customiz a When the DINJ is used b When the SPL is used Fig 8 1 1 SET key main screen GC 2014 91 92 8 Setting the Analyti
159. h Time Program El Pro Eun Direct Operation G G Configuration Service Maintenance E Stop Watch fe Lock select fumetion Inactive Single ADC 201 8 Vial DP HINJ Hk CHD E i 34 Chi a 1U ec 4 61 Chi 1 U JReturn Fig 16 2 1 E AOC status Batch schedule screen The AOC status is displayed on the Batch screen The AOC status is displayed Screen display Description Inactive AOC is not operating Taking vial Auto sampler arm is picking up a vial Preparation AOC is operating before injection Rinse AOC is operating after injection Putting vial Auto sampler arm is returning a vial to the tray Wait AOC is waiting for analysis GC 2014 219 220 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule 16 2 2 Parameter list Vial GC DP INJ Mk CMD Initial No and final vial No Example 1 9 Analysis starts from vial No 1 and ends at vial No 9 GC method file for analyses Channel No of chromatopac and file No Example 1 5 Channel 1 and data processing file No 5 are used This setting is ignored when using GC solution software Number of times to inject U is displayed when SAMPLE TYPE is set to Unknown S is displayed when SAMPLE TYPE is set to Standard S is displayed when SLOPE TEST is set to On C is displayed when CLEAN UP
160. h the dual column configuration Dual column configuration is used in following cases 1 NOTE Do not cross the columns L R It hinders correct analysis Dual FID I Column L Column R Dual INJ Dual AFC Fig 3 2 1 Dual column configuration 29 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines Same type of columns are connected to the left and right sides in order to background compensate the increase of the baseline during programmed temperature analysis Different types of columns are connected to the left and right sides in order to obtain a different chromatogram when a sample is injected to the left L side and right R side of the dual INJ GC 2014 33 34 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 3 2 Dual Column Packed FID Analysis E Setting analytical flow lines Setting analytical flow lines is described below For procedures to install columns and input analytical conditions refer to the operation manual Seta line 1 Press the SET key and then press the PF2 key Line Config 2 Set the dual INJ DINJ and dual FID DFID on a same line LINE1 is specified in the example below Lines 1 through 4 can be selected Line Configuration 5 i I lt a AOC or Y Y a 2 Set the dual
161. he DET key main screen 162 GC 2014 13 Detector 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID NOTE If the detector is set to Off when setting GC starting procedures the setting for all detectors specified in a respective flow line automatically becomes Off NOTE 1 START TEMP DET _ Yes DETECTOR Off AUTO IGNITE Off Always set to On when only FID is used To set to Off while using detectors other than FID at the same time set the detector to On on the DET key screen and then operate the ignition The messages ignition finished and ignition finished retried mean that ignition has been carried out properly The message DET 1 ignition failed or other similar messages mean that ignition has failed In this case the unit s conditions are as follows Hydrogen and air continue to be supplied when the manual flow controller is used When the optional solenoid valve to shut off supply gas is installed hydrogen and air are shut off by the valve When the APC is used APC s valve is closed to shut off hydrogen and air supply Potential causes of ignition failure are listed below Remove the cause then ignite the FID Column is not connected Detector gas is not supplied Detector gas flow rate is not proper Unused detector FID or FPD is set to On FID jet is clogged Clean or replace the FID jet Igniter filament is broken
162. he FID jet and DC voltage is applied between the electrodes If only pure carrier gas nitrogen helium or argon and hydrogen gas are mixed little current is produced between the electrodes When an organic compound is mixed with the carrier gas current is produced proportionally to the amount of organic compound present This is because ions mainly carbon ions are generated when an organic compound combusts within the hydrogen flame and the generated ions are captured by the collector For isomers the ion quantity generated is almost proportional to the number of carbons contained in the compound However carbon atoms in a C O form do not create a signal The presence o halogens in the compound decreases sensitivity Because the ion current obtained by the FID is very low it is amplified into a proper voltage then output to a Chromatopac or personal computer an Electrometer Collector Amplifier Chromatopac or PC High voltage Carrier gas Injection port Hydrogen Air Fig 13 1 1 GC 2014 153 13 Detector 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID 13 1 2 Setting the detector 13 1 2 1 Screen description Press the DET key to display the detector main screen shown in Fig 13 1 2 Here set the detector temperature the detector gas flow rate etc When the detector is configured in the analytical line the output signal settings appear in the lower portion of the screen DET 1
163. he contrast stand in front of the screen and press the Toggle lt or gt keys Toggle key Fig 6 2 1 GC 2014 71 72 3 6 Basic Key Operation k 3 Basic Key Operations 6 3 1 Screen display Use the following 10 keys to display the parameter and status screens DIAG SYSTEM MONIT SET FUNC COL FLOW INJ DET and OPTION Access the main function screens by pressing one of these keys then the secondary screens by selecting a PF menu item displayed at the bottom of the screen Because the PF menu includes direct operations some PF menu items do not have secondary screens E PF menu item selection Select a desired PF menu item by pressing the PF keys PF1 PF2 and PF3 underneath the screen which correspond to PF menu items EA LineConfg PF key i 0 Toggle key XX ON Fig 6 3 1 If the PF menu continues over two or more pages press the Toggle key to display the desired PF menu then press the PF key Example 1st page of PF menu Indicat 1 Start GC Clean Up H ccna de Press the Toggle key to display the 2nd page Indicates page 2 GC 2014 6 Basic Key Operation 6 3 Basic Key Operations 3 gt 6 3 2 Moving the cursor Use the four keys A V K and gt to move the cursor to an item to be set However for screens with listed items only the A and V keys may be available
164. he name of injection port oo 3A and detectors constructing eae the current line are under lined Fig 9 3 1 Flow rate monitor NOTE Flow controllers that have hot been installed are not displayed on the screen 9 3 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Temp Mon Monitor temperature of the column oven injection ports and detectors 9 2 GC 2014 107 108 29 9 Monitoring the GC 4 Zero Point Adjustment Zero point adjustment should be executed when the baseline is off scale If the baseline cannot be seen on the screen execute zero point adjustment so that the baseline returns to the zero point The baseline level can also be manually adjusted 9 4 1 Screen description Press Zero Adj or Zero Free PF menu from the Monit key main screen the chromatogram displayed on the monitor screen changes as shown in Fig 9 4 1 or Fig 9 4 2 Press Up or Down PF menu to adjust the baseline level manually Zero point adjustments are effective not only for the GC monitor screen but also a con nected pc or Chromatopac However zero point adjustments made on the Chromatopac do not adjust the monitor screen baseline level Down Held down Zero Adj Up Held down Zero Adj Zero Free Since the Down has been held down too long the zero point has deviated into the negative zone Fig 9 4 1 Zero point adjustment F
165. he set range Change the conditions and enter a new value GC 2014 299 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages 18 1 8 Optional device error AOC 20i s Code Message CS 6001 AOC1 rack error No 6002 AOC1 syringe error No 6003 AOC1 plunger error No 6004 AOC1 can not start No 6005 AOC1 RAM initialized No 6006 AOC1 ROM error No 6007 AOC1 CH2 command error No 6008 AOC1 sample vial is not set No 6009 AOC1 RAM error No 6010 AOC1 installation error No 6011 AOC1 CH1 error No 6012 AOC1 CH2 error No 6013 AOC1 waste vial is not set No 6014 AOC 20s rotating error No 6015 AOC 20s exp and ctrl error No 6016 AOC 20s up down error No 6017 AOC 20s can not start No 6018 AOC 20s vial setting error No 6019 AOC 20s vial returning error No 6020 AOC 20s holding error No 6021 AOC 20s sample vial removed No 6022 AOC 20s vial is not set No 6023 AOC2 rack error No 6024 AOC2 syringe error No 6025 AOC2 plunger error No 6026 AOC2 can not start No 6027 AOC2 RAM initialized No 6028 AOC2 ROM error No 6029 AOC2 CH2 command error No 6030 AOC2 sample vial is not set No 6031 AOC2 RAM error No 6032 AOC2 installation error No 6033 AOC2 CH1 error No 6034 AOC2 CH2 error No 6035 AOC2 waste vial is not set No One of these messages appears when an error has occurred in the AOC 20i auto injector or AOC 20s auto sampler For details refer to the AOC
166. himadzu representative 294 GC 2014 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages gt Detector flame error Code Message CS 4109 DET 1 flame is out No 4110 DET 2 flame is out No 4111 DET 3 flame is out No 4112 DET 4 flame is out No The detector flame FID FPD has been extinguished Check the gas supply and ignite the detector again If the flame error occurs repeatedly the hardware has failed The system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative FPD errors Code Message CS 4113 DET 1 FPD battery error Yes 4114 DET 2 FPD battery error Yes 4115 DET 3 FPD battery error Yes 4116 DET 4 FPD battery error Yes 4117 DET 1 FPD temperature error Yes 4118 DET 2 FPD temperature error Yes 4119 DET 3 FPD temperature error Yes 4120 DET 4 FPD temperature error Yes 4121 DET 1 FPD cooling fan error Yes 4122 DET 2 FPD cooling fan error Yes 4123 DET 3 FPD cooling fan error Yes 4124 DET 4 FPD cooling fan error Yes 4125 DET 1 FPD current error Yes 4126 DET 2 FPD current error Yes 4127 DET 3 FPD current error Yes 4128 DET 4 FPD current error Yes There is a problem with the FPD detector Refer to FPD User s Manual Errors 4125 4128 that are related to abnormal current cannot be recovered without turning off the system once TCD errors Code Message CS 4201 TCD signal is out of range No 42
167. iagnosis result does not satisfy the require ments Displayed when the diagnostic test was stopped or when an item is excluded from the test Displayed when diagnostic test is disabled for the item ignition test fora TCD for example Displayed when the diagnosis were not perfomed on an item because it has not been configured in an analytical line Certain diagnosis items can be performed for components which have not been configured For example for a detector not configured in any line Make Up Gas Control is not checked but its detector ROM check can be executed Displayed when the diagnosis item is not installed E Troubleshooting items which are Not Good Diagnosis item Countermeasures SEPTUM COUNTER Replace the septum Refer to 4 4 Septum in the operation manual INSERT COUNTER Replace the glass insert Refer to 4 6 Glass Insert in the operation manual ROOM TEMPERATURE Check the operation range ATMOSPHERIC PRESS Check the operation range GAS PRIMARY PRESS Increase supply pressure from the gas cylinder For example adjust the regulator DETECTOR IGNITION Refer to 5 1 Troubleshooting operation manual ANY OTHER ITEM Contact your Shimadzu representative GC 2014 gt 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 1 Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from the DIAG key main screen to display the L
168. iately If a program is running the countdown begins once the program is finished When the countdown elapses the GC stops and shuts down according to the GC stop parameters Current File 40 FILEO E Current File 40 FILEO E 2S ence Manual Start m Stop GC Stop Program Start Time min A Cont Sleep Time min Restart GC Fig 7 1 1 Main screen accessed in system Fig 7 1 2 Main screen accessed in system Off status On status GC 2014 79 80 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 1 SYSTEM Key Main Screen 7 1 2 Parameter CURRENT FILE Selection File No 0 9 Default File No 0 Changes the currently loaded file The GC will be controlled based on the parameters in the specified file START TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default 0 0 min Sets the period of time after flow control starts until temperature detector control starts START TEMP DET Selection Yes No Default Yes Select Yes to start temperature detector control after the start time is finished Select No to continuously flow the carrier gas and not to start temperature detector control DETECTOR Selection On Off Default On Prepaies the configured detector for analysis but does not ignite the FID or FPD AUTO IGNIT Selection On Off Default On Ignites the FID FPD detector automatically Select On for the FID FPD detector to stand by in the ignited status Select Off for it to
169. ig 9 4 2 Zero free adjustment NOTE Zero point adjustments are only valid for the currently displayed detector To adjusts the zero point for another detector first switch to its display by pressing Chng Line PF menu then execute the adjust ment For the TCD press Zero Free first turn the TCD zero point rough adjuster on the right side of the unit to set the baseline close to 0 y V and then press Zero Adj GC 2014 1 0 29 10 Starting and Stopping Analysis 1 Making an Injecting and Starting an Analysis 10 1 1 Verifying the gas chromatograph status 1 Ensure that the STATUS indicator light is green 2 When the STATUS light is green perform a zero cause adjustment control if necessary For a description of the items which determine the Ready Status refer to 16 6 6 Setting the Ready Check Parameters For the dual packed INJ the STATUS light becomes green and also the monitor injection screen appears Inject a sample following the directions displayed on the screen NOTE Instructions on the monitor injection screen are based on the polarity settings of the detector When settings are opposite from polarity in order to invert the peak for example to analyze hydrogen using nitrogen carrier gas on the TCD inject a sample into the opposite inlet of the one instructed on the screen Regular key operation is possible when the monitor injection screen is displayed If there is no key operation for a
170. ignal out put SYSTEM key Starts stops GC Manages the analytical condition file PF key Selects the PF menu displayed at bottom of the screen PF programmable function Toggle key Toggles through the PF menu displayed at bottom of the screen MONIT key Monitors the GC status and analysis status Displays the GC temperature pressure and flow rate status for each heated zone as well as chromatograms SET key Accesses commonly used items such as temperature pressure and flow rate for each component on one screen Manages the analytical condition file like the SYSTEM key FUNC key Accesses less frequently used items COL key Sets the oven temperature program FLOW key Sets the carrier gas flow rate parameters such as pressure flow rate and split ratio INJ key Sets the temperature of injection port or temperature program for an OCI PTV DET key Sets the detector temperature range and current or other detector related param eters OPTION key Sets the parameters for auto injector AUX temperature controller AUX APC AUX AMC and CRG HELP key Describes the procedure and sugggests valid parameter ranges Jumps to a desired item using an index function Cursor key Moves cursor up down left and right A V lt and gt A blinking cursor indicates the location of parameter value entry lt and gt keys may be used to change the selection Numeric keys 0 9 Enter numeric values Cl
171. ime ocetred Code Walie Medification during analysis 46 13 18 15 Edel 63 Medification during analysis 46 13 18 13 E4se1 26669 Medification during analysis 06 13 18 13 E4se1 26668 Medification during analysis 06 13 18 13 E4ee1 26667 Medification during analysis 06 13 18 13 Edsel 26627 Modification during analysis 06 13 12 18 Ed 29 Estuni lear Log Print Fig 14 2 6 Error log screen NOTE If there are more items than can be displayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left and right arrow keys 2 PF menut PF menu Description Reference section Deletes all displayed logs Clear Lo When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the 9 message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the error log to a Chromatopac es 186 GC 2014 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 7 Diagnostic log When 5 DIAGNOSTIC LOG is selected the resulst of the standard diagnosis are displayed The results of the last diagnosis are shown in the Details PF menu screen described in 14 1 Standard Diagnosis Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from of the DIAG key main screen then select 5 DIAGNOSTIC LOG The screen shown in Fig 14 2 7 appears Up to 50 logs are saved lf the number of logs exceeds 50 existing logs are deleted starting from the oldest Diagno
172. in 60 gt o o o rm o ayes Moy seb dnayey wo o o 0 20 40 60 80 100 KPa Makeup gas pressure c Makeup gas N2 ml min 1000 500 e1 MOI Aly 0 20 40 60 80 100 KPa Air pressure b Air ml min 60 50 40 30 20 ayes MO seb dn yen 0 20 40 60 80 100 KPa Makeup gas pressure d Makeup gas He Fig 13 1 4 Pressure flow rate calibration curves examples 158 GC 2014 13 Detector 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID 13 1 4 Setting the detector gas flows APC The FID detector gas consists of makeup gas hydrogen and air The makeup gas is inert gas supplied to the detector to prevent peak tailing and optimize FID sensitivity Usually the carrier gas is used as the makeup gas Hydrogen gas and air are supplied to be combusted inside the detector creating the FID flame 13 1 4 1 Screen description Select Det Gas PF menu from the DET key main screen to display the flow screen shown in Fig 13 1 5 When the Start Flow status is selected on the SYSTEM key screen the makeup gas flow starts Just before the ignition procedure begins hydrogen and air flow starts Selecting Stop Temp Det status from the SYSTEM key main screen gas flow stop Flow DET 2 DA He LINE L Presa kPa L Flow ths MakeUp L Presa kPa L Flow ts L Gaz Kind Air B L Presa kPa L Flow th
173. in PF1 E Actual and set values Actual current values are highlighted while set values are underlined The actual value blinks when it is NOT READY the actual value has not reached the set value When the values are equal READY status the actual value stops blinking Control Mode OO Lett TT L Inlet Freio EGER L Col flow s Flow CARI Inlet press kPa Column flow mn Liner vel os t t Actual values Set values Actual values Set values When the DINJ is used When the SPL is used Fig 6 1 2 GC 2014 3 gt 69 70 6 1 3 6 Basic Key Operation 6 1 Keypad Description and Operation Status indicators Three status lights indicate the GC status regardless of the screen display The STATUS TEMP and FLOW lights indicate the GC status the temperature control status and the gas control status respectively Light color and illumination are also used to indicate instrument parameter status GC 2014 E STATUS indicator Color Status Meaning Off Power is OFF On System is ready Green z Blinking Program like the temperature program are executing Yell On System is OFF Alternatively the system is ON but is not ready ellow Blinking Diagnosis baking or flow controller calibration is being executed Red On An error has occurred in system E TEMP indicator
174. installation test only one detector can be set per analytical line If two or more detectors are set an error message appears Set the dimensions of the column installed Example Set the dimensions of the column using Column of the FLOW key Press Load PF menu to load the analytical conditions of the standard installation test If the analytical condition need to be changed for the installation test change the parameters Make an injection then verify whether the data has been acquired correctly When analysis finishes press Unload PF menu to return the analytical conditions to their former status GC 2014 3 gt 193 3 14 Diagnosis 14 6 Peak Generator Select 6 PEAK GENERATOR to generate electronic peaks to confirm of the operation of the data processing unit 14 6 1 Screen description Select 6 PEAK GENERATOR from the DIAG key screen to display the Peak generator screen shown in Fig 14 6 1 Peak Generator Peak Generator _On Mode Noi ge Chi Standard Signal On Che Standard Signal lt gt oft Ch Standard signal Ott Ch4 Standard Signal Off Ma E s_ Fig 14 6 1 Peak generator setup screen 14 6 2 Parameter list PEAK GENERATOR Range On Off Default Off MODE Range Noise No Noise Trunc Default Noise Ch1 Ch4 STANDARD SIGNAL Range On Off Default Off 14 6 3 PF menu Reference PF menu Description section Specify the parameters retenti
175. is after performing injection port maintenance When pressed after maintenance of injection port is completed GC 2014 81 82 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters 7 2 1 Screen Description Select Clean Up PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen to display the clean up parameter setup screen shown in Fig 7 2 1 The parameters set for the clean up program are set by including Clean Up Para as part of the GC start procedure Clean up should be performed to eliminate contamination before analysis Reform the clean up when the gas chromatograph has not been used for a while or if a new column has been installed Clean Up EN W FILEA ANN Column Oven i Tempit 25 AT E Le L Col flow F Col flow aie Temp to Clean Up ee FILEA Column Oven i Tempit 25 NN E Le Inlet BEEE AR 108 0 eplit ratio E 7 Purge flow a Jer EN SPL mT Temp E 250 0 Temp tc PTA Anc Ab Flot al a DINJ Fig 7 2 1 Setting the clean up parameters GC 2014 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters 3 gt 7 2 2 Parameter list E Main screen of clean up e COLUMN OVEN TEMP Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 25 0 C Sets the default value of the column oven temperature for the clean up method The clean up oven temperature should be 20 to 30 C higher than
176. is no problem in the gas supply an AFC value error may have occurred Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Abnormal component operation Code Message cs 2134 CAR1 AFC is out of control Yes 2135 CAR2 AFC is out of control Yes 2136 CAR1 AFC is out of control Yes 2137 CAR2 AFC is out of control Yes 2138 CAR1 prim is out of range No 2139 CAR2 prim is out of range No 2140 CAR3 prim is out of range No Verify whether gas is supplied stably at the required pressure If there is no problem in the gas supply the control system such as the APC may have failed Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative When errors 2138 2140 occur carrier gas is not properly supplied Check the gas remaining in the gas cylinder and piping connections Control setting errors Code Message cs 2141 CAR1 is not controlled No 2142 CAR2 is not controlled No 2143 CAR1 is not controlled No These messages appear when the temperature control starts without carrier gas control Set the setting of the flow controller to On or remove unused carrier gas line from the line configuration GC 2014 18 1 4 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages gt Abnormal component operation Code Message cs 2144 CAR1 L DAFC is out of control Yes 2145 CAR1 R DAFC is out of control Yes 2146 CAR2 L DAFC
177. is out of control Yes 2147 CAR2 R DAFC is out of control Yes 2148 AMC L is out of control Yes 2149 AMC L is out of control Yes 2150 AMC R is out of control Yes 2151 AMC1 is out of control Yes 2152 AMC2 is out of control Yes 2153 AMGC3 is out of control Yes 2154 AMC4 is out of control Yes 2155 AMCS5 is out of control Yes 2156 AMCG6 is out of control Yes 2157 AMC7 is out of control Yes 2158 AMGC8 is out of control Yes 2159 AMC9 is out of control Yes 2160 AMC10 is out of control Yes 2161 CAR1 SAFC is out of control Yes 2162 CAR2 SAFC is out of control Yes Verify whether gas is supplied stably at the required pressure If there is no problem in the gas supply the control system such as the APC may have failed Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Communication errors External device communication errors i e Chromatopac Code Message CS 4001 Time out No 4002 Parity error No 4003 Message is not accepted No 4004 Data is invalid No 4005 Command is invalid No 4006 Data is out of range No 4007 TRS port is shut down No 4008 TRS file error No One of these messages appears during a link failure or communication failure When a communication error occurs the link is automatically disconnected When one of these messages appears check the connection status and reset the link GC 2014 293 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages AOC communication err
178. isplayed correctly Example If the gas cylinder pressure supplied to the GC 2014 is 700 kPa select 500 900 kPa This is not displayed when the carrier gas flow controller is DAFC GC 2014 253 DAFC UNIT Selection DAFC AMC LR Default DAFC When using the dual AFC as an AMC for detector makeup gas set to AMC LR If AMC LR is set the injection port connected to the dual AFC becomes off from the flow line and is not displayed on the flow line configuration screen 8 3 1 Set the DAFC unit prior to starting GCsolution DTCD PREAMPLIFIER Selection x1 x10 Default x1 When it is set to x10 TCD output is amplified ten times 24 GC 2014 eee 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 Service and Maintenance 16 7 1 Screen description Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen to display the Service Maintenance screen shown in Fig 16 7 1 Function Services Maintenance Time Scheduler Installation Position Batch Installation Piping Time Program Initialize El Pre Rim E Direct Operation E Power Consumption S GC Configuration E Service Service Maintenance E Stop Watch E Lock Select fimction TTTS Select function Fig 16 7 1 Service maintenance menu screen 16 7 2 Parameter list INSTALLATION POSITION Specify the heated zone locations for installed components INSTALLATION PIPING Set the installation status of the carrier gas and the detector gas flow controller
179. itions In such case drying out is necessary to avoid a short circuit at the heater in the injection port or the detector Under some transport conditions condensation may form inside the GC components To avoid injection port or detector heater unit short circuits allow the unit sufficient time to dry after transport and follow the procedure below after installation 1 Seal the injection port and detector without attaching a column Refer to the figure below 2 Remove the injection ports INJ and detectors DET from all configured analytical flow lines to prevent the heater from turning ON 3 Set the column oven temperature to 300 C and start the GC 4 Keep the column temperature at 300 C for 2 hours or more Thermal insulation cup Graphite ferrule with a wire Column nut or Column nut of injection port Plug When a packed column connecting When a capillary column connecting joint is used joint is used GC 2014 3 1 Installation A 3 Gas Supply Plumbing E Supply gases AN CAUTION 1 Gas supply pressure should not exceed the maximum pressure listed below Excessive pressure may break pressure control valve or other parts 2 When sharing a gas source with other instruments check specifications of all instruments to be used including this unit and supply gas so that requirements of all the instruments can be satisfied at the same time The following gases
180. king If there is no problem with the gas supply the hardware has failed The system cannot be used in this condition Turn off the system and contact your Shimadzu representative Program errors Set value change Code Message CS 4301 Settings were changed No This message appears when a set value was changed while the program is running If the parameter or event has not yet been executed the new value is used for the analysis Time over errors Code Message cs 4302 Program time is over No 4303 Clean up time is over No 4304 Pre run prog time is over No These messages appear when the program execution time exceeds the maximum allowable value 9999 99 min Change the program so that its total execution time does not exceed 9999 99 min Although the program can be executed even after this error occurs it is discontinued at 9999 99 min GC 2014 18 1 7 Operations errors Value outside of range was entered Code Message 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages cS 5001 Input parameter out of range No When the numeric value entered is out of the valid range this message or valid setting range is displayed Enter a valid number File operation errors Code Message cs 5002 Invalid file no No 5003 This file is now used No These massages appear when an incorrect file operation was attempted Press a
181. l FID amp Two columns are used because the dual INJ and dual FID are recognized as a single unit respectively However this is considered to be a single line GC 2014 Outputted Signal Detector amp Detector cell Column Injection port flow comtrol Fig 2 1 1 Concept of analytical flow lines Outputted Signa i Dual FID amp Dual FID Column L Column R Dual INJ Dual AFC Fig 2 1 2 An example of analytical flow lines 2 Before Use 2 1 Setting Analytical Flow Lines E How to set lines 1 2 Press the SET key then press the PF2 key Line Config Line Configuration Move the cursor to the unit to be set in a iii Aca II line and select a line using lt gt keys SFL Make sure to specify an injection port E DINJ d a detector to which l i ETRE a SS a TTT connected in the same line Any La number from LINE1 through LINE4 can DFID be selected RATS DTCD T Option TTT a0c1 N AOCe E Precautions for setting analytical flow lines NM CAUTION Set analytical flow lines correctly Incorrectly set analytical flow lines hinder the unit s normal operation and may also damage columns or detectors at worst e e Specify units to be used as part of a line Only units specified as part of a line are temperature regulated
182. l Output Port Specify a connector number to output analog signals ANALOG OUT 1 Ch1 ANALOG OUT 2 Ch2 Channel number of a detector specified at the last is effective If TCD signal was outputted to Ch1 formerly and FID signal is newly specified to be outputted to Ch1 as shown in the screen on the right TCD signal becomes OFF automatically Line Configuration DI Injector II SPL EE DW A 10000000 g DFID DED A option M lt gt ACL A0CZ W W Retirn letect DET HE 1 Tempt MO 00 0 Flame Ort signal Polarity es Filter Time Constant 2alms Control Mode Dual eignal Output Port Eackground sig gave Background sig comp Det sig subtraction signal Attenuation Analog Signal Type GC 2014 21 22 2 Before Use 2 2 Outputting Analog Signals to the Chromatopac Signal Attenuation or Signal Range Names of items automatically change according to types of analog signals as listed below Set multiplying power attenuation rate of output signals for all types Change the setting when the peak obtained by the data processing unit is saturated Signal attenuation When analog signal type is wide Output signal becomes smaller when the setting is changed from x 1 gt x 21 gt x 22 gt x238 gt x2 Signal range When analog signal type is linear Output signal becomes smaller when the setting is changed from x1 gt x10 1 x10 2 gt x 103 gt x
183. lect One of the following three modes Off Disables high pressure injection On Sets the column inlet pressure to high value immediately Auto Immediately sets the column inlet pressure to high pressure When analysis is finished and the GC returns to the ready status the column inlet pressure automatically increases Injection analysis starts Analysis ends Injection analysis starts Analysis ends READY Y v READY f lamp light i lamp light Column inlet Column inlet pressure i pressure i during high 1 during high 1 pressure l Temperature program pressure Temperature program injection 2 1 injection Spat ae 1 Y 1 l Y 1 Y 4 1 I E I 1 E 1 1 Y A 1 A A E CERNE D AAA Doe OSN Column inlet l Column inlet i pressure 1 pa pressure ioti during analysis A during analysis 1 A A A A START Column inlet pressure STARTI Column inlet pressure Analysis starts is automatically turned is turned to high to high HIGH PRESS INJECTION MODE On HIGH PRESS INJECTION MODE Auto HIGH PRESS INJECTION PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 12 2 5 Default 100 0 kPa Set the column inlet pressure for high pressure injection HIGH PRESS INJECTION TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Set the period of time after analysis starts until the column inlet pressure returns to the original value Usually set this equal to the sampling time E Splitter Fix SPLITTER FIX MODE Selection
184. lium As sample compounds pass the filament the fila ment temperature increases because the thermal conductivity of the sample compounds is less than that of the carrier gas The filament temperature changes affect its resistance the resistance is measured and produces a chromatogram A reference filament also exists where only carrier gas flows to eliminate background resis tance fluctions O O TCD cell Filament lt Reference gas Output signal Carrier gas Fig 13 2 1 The TCD sensitivity is proportional to the difference in thermal conductivity between the sample and the carrier gas Because the thermal conductivity of the sample is lower than that of the carrier gas the TCD sensitivity increases as the thermal conductivity of the carrier gas increases For high sensitivity analysis use helium with a purity of 99 9995 or more Thermal conductivity k x10 Wm 1K 1 at room temperature 300 K Gas Thermal Gas Thermal conductivity conductivity He 1499 Inorganic CO2 166 2 Simple H2 1815 compounds H20 181 compounds N2 259 8 Organic acetone 115 Ar 177 2 compounds hexane 128 GC 2014 13 Detector 13 2 Thermal Conductivity Detector TCD gt 13 2 2 Setting the detector 13 2 2 1 Screen description Press the DET key to display the Detector main screen shown in Fig 13 3 2 Here set the detector temperature the detector gas fl
185. lling Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines E Setting analytical flow lines Setting analytical flow lines is described below For procedures to install columns and input analytical conditions refer to the operation manual 1 Set a line 1 Press the SET key and then press the PF2 key Line Config 4 5 Single DET 2 Set the SPL and single DET SFID in the screen below on a same line LINE1 is specified in the example below Lines 1 through 4 can be selected Line Configuration A 100000000 oR SPL OO Detector M SFID NL amp tion TM AOCL ANC2 GC 2014 gt 59 60 EEE GC 2014 eee 2 5 Analysis i 1 Analysis Flow Chart For detailed descriptions about analysis procedures refer to the operation manual 5 1 1 Preparation Injection port preparation Column preparation Select an injection port suitable to the sample injection method Confirm that the septum and insert are properly attached Check dirt on the septum and the number of injections and replace it when necessary after approximately 100 injections Attach the column to the injection port and detector correctly When the above preparations are complete turn ON the GC power switch on the lower right side of the GC 5 1 2 Setting Parameters Set the column information and the flow rates Set the temperature of the detector and the injection port Set the COL temperature a
186. low controller settings Installation status setup screen The names CAR1 CAR2 and CAR3 are automatically assigned in ascending order of the slot No for each installed AFC Specify the flow controller carrier gas settings for each CAR UNIT TYPE For display only When an AFC is installed this is automatically displayed If a manual flow controller is installed specify the installation Slot No See below SPLITTER is automatically displayed for the Unit Type SLOT NO Selection NON MSLOT1 7 Default NON This item can be set only when a manual flow controller is installed Select the Slot No where the manual flow controller is installed Slot No which have already been set cannot be selected When an AFC is installed its SLOT no 2 6 is automatically recognized and displayed GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance TEMP PORT Selection NON INJ1 INJ2 DET1 DET2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 Default NON Specify the injection port heated zone where the flow controller tubing is connected This assosiates the flow controller to an injection port E Detector gas flow controller settings When installing detector flow control units the names DET 1 to DET 4 are automatically assigned starting with the one nearest to the GC Specify the to flow controller detector gas settings for each detector No DET 1 to DET 4 CONT TYPE For display only The type of each installed detector control unit is automaticall
187. ls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant FLOW Controls the system so that the flow rate remains constant e INJECTION PORT TEMP Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the injection port temperature the default temperature for a programmable injection port e DETECTOR TEMP Range 0 0 400 0 C in FID Default 25 0 C Set the detector temperature Allowable temperature ranges vary for each detector Refer to range specified for the detec tor s in use The column flow rate ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less and the calculated total flow rate is 1 200 ml min 2 The linear velocity ranges from 0 to the value at which the calculated column inlet pressure is 970 kPa or less oo flow rate The purge flow rate ranges from 0 to the total flow rate subtracted by the column flow rate and the split GC 2014 gt 93 94 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 1 SET Key Main Screen 8 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section File Displays file list to change the current file 8 2 On this sub screen you can select files to load copy initialize and rename f Specifies the injection port detectors and options which make up the ana Line Confg lytical flow line 8 3 Units set on this sub screen are displayed
188. lysis counter 9 Analysis counter g setting to warn 104 setting to warn 104 Return a Dual INJ b SPL Fig 14 3 1 Analysis counter screen When the dual INJ DINJ is used the number of analyses is indicated as follows Dual mode The value counted on the L left inlet is indicated when the signal polarity of the detector DFID DTCD is The value counted on the R right inlet is indicated when the signal polarity is Single mode The value counted on the selected inlet L or R is indicated 188 GC 2014 14 Diagnosis 14 3 Analysis Counter 3 gt 14 3 2 Parameter list AOC WAIT Selection Yes No Default No When the threshold is exceeded during batch processing select Yes to temporarily pause the AOC operation when the analysis counter has exeed the limit USE COUNTER Selection Yes No Default Yes ANALYSIS COUNTER Selection 0 SETTING TO WARN Range 0 9999 Default 100 NOTE The septum glass insert replacement interval depends on the type of analysis Periodically replace the septum and the glass insert even if the warning message is not displayed 14 3 3 PF menu PF menu Description RES section Reset Resets analysis number counter of the current item Next Displays the setup screen of the analysis counter of another injection port GC 2014 189 3 14 Diagnosis 1 4 4 Coolant Consumption Counter The coolant consumption display allows you t
189. make the pressure zero For APC turn off the APC for hydrogen gas Seal the column connection Capillary adapter Graphite ferrule with a wire Column nut Plug When a detector that uses hydrogen gas is not in use GC 2014 1 Installation 1 3 Gas Supply Plumbing AN CAUTION Hydrogen gas supply precautions Make sure that the supply pressure to the flow controller does not exceed 500kPa If the flow controller fails with a hydrogen gas supply pressure over 500 kPa a dangerous situation exists Lange amounts of leaking hydrogen could cause the FID flame to expand out of the detector Hydrogen gas is lighter than air If it leaks it can accumulate near the ceiling Pay strict attention to ventilation so that leaking hydrogen is vented out of the room and cannot accumulate AN WARNING Hydrogen carrier gas precautions If much hydrogen gas is released into the poorly ventilated room it may cause the explosion 1 In order to prevent hydrogen gas accumulate in the room attach tubes to split vent purge vent TCD vent and ECD vent Discharge the gas to open air or a ventilation equipment such as the draft chamber 2 Install the GC in the well ventilated area Ex in the draft chamber 3 In order to measure hydrogen gas concentration equip a hydrogen gas sensor in the room Keep the hydrogen concentration low GC 2014 gt 11 1 Installation 1 3 Ga
190. may be limited depending on the column in use purge flow rate and gas restrictor GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 12 2 6 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position Print Prints the flow rate program to a hromatopac 12 2 6 4 Setting a flow rate program E Screen terminology lt 1 ramp flow rate program gt Flow rate Initial flow rate FLOW F1 Initial flow rate hold time TIME a 2 F1 Program rate RATE b Final flow rate FLW F2 Final flow rate hold time TIM c Program Program Time starts finishes E Program creation lt 1 ramp flow rate program gt 30ml min 5min 3ml min 20ml min 10min der Flow CARI 5 LINE A FILES Flow monitor Yg METE Program total min 23 33 Rate Ha Flow Time min Init 20 8 14 He Lat 3 08 30 4 10 og end END Fig 12 2 11 Flow rate program example 138 GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 3 gt 12 2 7 Split ratio program You can change the split ratio during a split analysis In addition you can set a split ratio program after the sampling time has elapsed during splitless analysis The split ratio program and the gas saver perform basically the same operation However th
191. me constant can be changed by measuring the peak half width Fig 13 3 1 shows the relationship between the peak half width and the time constant where the S N ratio is maximaized For example if the half width of a peak is 0 1 sec the S N ratio is maximaized when the time constant is set to 20 ms 12 g 4 S z 08 Half width 10s 3 0 6 Half width 1s E ga A A FO a Half width 0 1s 2 02 0 1 1 1 1 o o o o o o o PPM HM LL KL SAY DS SOS IS we X Time constant Fig 13 3 1 Relationship between time constant and S N ratio 170 GC 2014 13 4 cus If the baseline drifts considerably during programmed temperature analysis the baseline drift can be saved as a background baseline in GC s waveform memory background save Afterwards the background can be subtracted from the signal background compensation The below is background compensation procedures 1 4 Set background storage Select where the background baseline should be saved on the DET key main screen Either Buff 1 or Buff 2 can be selected BACKGROUND SIG SAVE Buff 1 or Buff 2 BACKGROUND SIG COMP _Off Execute analysis without sample injection Baseline fluctuation is saved in Buff 1 or Buff 2 as background Set background compensation Set the background to be subtracted as the baseline fluctuation on the DET key main screen
192. me to a standard compound retention time REMAIN TIME The longest program time subtracted by the current retention time is displayed LONGEST PROGRAM TIME The longest program time indicates the total time of the longest program when comparing the temperature program the pressure program the flow rate program and the time program 9 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Temp Mon Displays the current and set temperatures of column injection port and 92 detector Displays inlet pressure total flow rate and purge flow rate for injection port Flow Mon and hydrogen flow rate air flow rate and makeup gas flow rate for detector 9 3 The display format depends on the typeof flow controller installed Zero Adj Automatically moves the baseline to zero point 9 4 Zero Free Returns to the baseline level before zero point adjustment 9 4 Up Moves the baseline up by 100 uV from current level 9 4 Down Moves the baseline down by 100 uV from current level 9 4 Switches the graph display from chromatogram and column oven tempera Chno Graph ture program to chromatogram and pressure program For direct injection 9 P mode with flow control the flow rate program is displayed instead of the pressure program Chng Line Displays the monitor screen for another configured analytical line Switch between monitored lines by pressing MONIT key from the monitor screen GC 2014 gt 105 29 9 Moni
193. mode is set to DIRECT PRESS Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant during an oven temperature program VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant during an oven temperature program 130 GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 3 gt CARRIER GAS TYPE Selection He N2 H2 Ar Default He Specify the carrier gas type supplied to the AFC This parameter is used for the measurement control of the flow rate If this parameter is not set correctly flow rate calculations may not be performed correctly Example If this parameter is set to N2 when He is actually used the displayed total flow rate column flow rate and linear velocity are lower than the actual values NOTE 1 Set the column inlet pressure and total flow rate so that they are within the ranges shown in 2 8J MO 8101 Fig 12 2 5 The ranges differ according to the columns to be used and purge flow rates Available setting ranges He H2 Available settable ranges N2 1200 150kPa mUmin For He and H2 For N2 o 70053 Lise ml min Primary 2 pressure 600 980kPa 3 ml min 17777 Primary pressure 980kPa 360 i 5 P ml min 300 pressura ml min X 600kPa OX 150 mUmin gooKPa A Q 290kPa 590kPa 970kPa 290kPa 590kPa 970kPa Column inlet pressure Column inlet pressure Fig 12 2 5 Available setting ranges for the AFC 2
194. n SLOT4 the R side is set on SLOTS Setting slots for TCD L detector gas is unnecessary because makeup gas is usually not used for packed TCD HEATER PORT Selection NON INJ1 INJ2 DET 1 DET2 AUX3 AUX4 AUX5 Default NON Specify the detector heated zone where the flows controller tubing is connected This assosiates the flow controller to a detector When CONT TYPE is WDFID only heater ports that the DFID is connected to can be set for piping When CONT TYPE is TCD L piping of two units of heater ports need to be set The upper line is for the pre heater and the lower line is for the TCD cell A port that the DFID or a pre heater unit without the FID cell is connected to can be set for the pre heater and a port that the DTCD is connected to can be set for the TCD cell Only heater port that the DFID is connected to is shared for temperature regulation of the DFID and TCD L pre heater set for both GC 2014 3 gt 259 e 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance Installation Piping Installation Piping DET TT DET TT Cont Type WDOFID Cont Type WOFID DET APC Mo Detarc 1 DET AFC Mo Detarc 1 DET APC Mo Detare 2 DET APC Mo Detarc 2 Unit Type DET Ga amp s Unit Type APC 3ch Slot No qH HELOT4 Slot No LOTA Slot Mo HSLOTS Slot Mo SLOTS Heater Port DET1 Heater Port DET1 OT os TT OT oa TT Cont Type TCD L Cont Type TCD L DET APC No 22 DET APC No 22 DET APC Ho 2
195. n 5m of the equipment Fire extinguishers must be present Secure gas cylinders firmly with cylinder clamps so they cannot fall over Use oil free pres sure valves only Never use tubing which has contacted oil When finished with the gas tighten the main valve of the cylinder immediately GC 2014 10 1 Installation 1 3 Gas Supply Plumbing E Precautions on handling hydrogen gas NM WARNING HYDROGEN GAS PRECAUTIONS Hydrogen can explode if it is allowed to accumulate in a poorly venti lated area 1 Connect gas lines correctly Hydrogen is released into the room if the tubing is accidentally connected to the air inlet 2 When the unit is not in use close the main valve of the hydrogen gas cylinder Check for leaks at the main valve 3 Every time the unit is used check for leaks along the flow line from gas cylinder to the unit interior 4 To prevent an explosion due to a hydrogen gas leak the room in which the unit is used should be well ventilated Prohibit the use of open flame in this room 5 Close the main valve of the hydrogen cylinder immediately after completing the analyses Then turn OFF the unit and perform normal shut down procedures AN WARNING HYDROGEN GAS HANDLING PRECAUTIONS The accumulation of hydrogen gas inside the column oven can cause an explosion Close all hydrogen regulator valves not in use and stop gas supply When a manual regulator valve is used turn its control to
196. n the injection port after injection INJ SPEED PLUNGER Selecton Slow Middle Fast Default Fast Specifies the plunger speed during injection AOC POWER Selection On Off Default On Turns the AOC power on and off built in GC 2014 power supply 196 GC 2014 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Start Starts AOC The GC also starts when AOC injects a sample Temporarily stops the AOC Stop If Start PF menu is pressed in stop status the AOC resumes the opera E tion before Stop PF menu was pressed Priority Sets up a Priority analysis 15 1 4 Other Para Sets AOC options and customization 15 1 7 Sampler Sets the auto sampler sub injector and bar code reader 15 1 10 Reset Resets AOC to the status before control was started a Loads parameters from the AOC to the AOC setup screen of the gas Upload chromatograph Print Prints the parameters on the Chromatopac ere Next Toggles the screen among AOC parameters AUX temperature AUX APC AUX AMC CRG screens in this order GC 2014 gt 197 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 4 AOC priority analysis Select Priority PF menu from the AOC main screen to display the AOC priority sample screen shown in Fig 15 1 2 The batch can only be interrupted when the AOC is operating Enter the sample injection No
197. na 220 16 2 4 Creating a new batch schedule o ooococcocccoo eee eae 221 16 2 5 ParameteriliSt 5 csc ars A dean os Lede alee deh end ase 222 16 2 6 PE MONOU irin tie dations che i oa tana ee thy Midian chan ees 223 16 2 7 Editing a batch schedule 0 00 ccc tenes 223 16 2 8 Batch processing Setup example 000 cece teens 224 16 3 Time Program oso since eee ee Se Ree A A ee eS 225 16 3 1 screen description aiii A A eee Re dd ce eae te a oe 225 16 3 2 PFMONU weeccc ect aeseeer teed aet ane yao SEGRE A DARE ET Rte eae beeen NET a 225 16 3 3 Creating a new time progra 226 16 3 4 PE IM dos a eae tee ote el dake A ed Sadek he he had 226 16 3 5 Time Program parameters nanna cee teeta 227 16 3 6 Editing a time program tuaran onan ee ee eke ae Piao ed A 228 16 3 7 Time program setup example 229 16 4 Pre Run Program eeta a OE A eee eee eee eens 231 16 4 1 Screen description ota sce e Se Rebar da oie a Gane eee 231 16 4 2 PF Menu it A Ue ee oe ER ea AA re oe tn 231 16 4 3 Creating a new Pre Run program 2 0 6 232 16 4 4 Editing a Pre Run Progresista ria ib hace di air 232 16 4 5 After Pre Run program is finished 0 000 ccc tte eee 232 16 4 6 Pre Run Program set up example 0 00 00 tenes 233 16 5 Direct Operation sonen es el ee A ee te tee as eas 234 16 5 1 screen description 2 ac aara is Meee he Sekt ee ae ee le oe keine planed a 234 16 5 2 Parameter list sa as seat eat
198. nal Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 8 Other AOC Parameter INJ SPEED SYRINGE Selection Slow Fast Default Fast Set the syringe injection speed USING 3 SOLVENT VIALS Selection Yes No Default No Specifies whether three solvent vials are present and the autosampler carousel is not in use This item is only available when USE OF THE SAMPLER in Sampler PF menu is set to Not Use SOLVENT SELECT Selection All A only B only C only Default All This item is available when USING 3 SOLVENT VIALS is set to Yes or USE OF THE SAMPLER in Sampler PF menu is set to Use All Three solvent types are used A only Only the solvent in the vial A is used B only Only the solvent in the vial B is used C only Only the solvent in the vial C is used For the details refer to Fig 3 4 1 in 3 4 Auto Sampler in the AOC 20 User s Manual AIR SUCTION Selection Yes No Default No Set whether or not 1 ul of air is aspirated into the siringe after aspirating sample This type of injection is useful for samples with a wide boiling point range when compound discrimination problems can occur AM CAUTION When the column initial temperature is high or when a PEG based polar column is used the column life may be shortened by injecting air PLUNGER SUCTION SPEED Selection Slow Middle Fast Default Fast Set the plunger speed during sample injection SPEED OF PLUNGER
199. nalysis i vc c ee eee eee ee ee Ee Pee en ee ee 39 Packed Analysis Using the Single DET 00 cee eee ee eee eee 42 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines Installation Location for Capillary Columns 00 00 e eee eee eee 47 Capillary Analysis Using the Dual FID When a detector adopter with purge is used 0c cece eee eee 49 Capillary Analysis Using the Dual FID When a makeup gas flow controller is used 0 c eee ee eee eee 52 Capillary TCD Analysis ooooocoooncr eee teens 54 Single DET cio wee EG Glee hele eee oe Re WE ee a Ee ale 58 Analysis Analysis Flow Chart 0 00 eee eee eee eee 61 5 1 1 Preparationi lt o4c 48 iat hae A eh eh eee eee ds 61 5 1 2 Setting Parameters i sa lt A A A ta Beaten 61 5 1 3 AnalYSIS bip iD a bee ad 62 5 2 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 8 1 8 2 329 Contents Notes for Analysis ooooococcoccr teen eee eee eee 63 Basic Key Operation Keypad Description and Operation 00 00 eee eee 67 6 1 1 K ypad operation saci cade bathe bes teed beaks is baddest adie gd deat 68 6 1 2 A RN 69 6 1 3 Status indicators er asia Sei A A A A A ws 70 Adjusting The Display oo ooooccncccnnn eee 71 Basic Key Operations 0 cece eee eee eee 72 6 3 1 screenidisplay arizona tar a By the thew 72 6 3 2 Moving the Curso erie aa shag cts A Pe ed Me OU in 73 6 3 3 Entering numeric values jie
200. nalytical Parameters and File Management i 4 Changing Items Displayed with Customiz Screen description Select Customiz PF menu from the SET key main screen to display the Display Custom ization screen shown in Fig 8 4 1 On this screen set the items which will be displayed on the SET key main screen Set an item to On to display it on the main screen Set the item to Off to wide its display Settings are the same for all lines However for the dual AFC only column inlet pressure column flow rate and control mode are displayed For the AFC when the sampling time is set to On the sampling time is only displayed on the SPLITLESS injection mode Move the cursor using the A and V keys to select an item to be changed select On or Off using the lt and gt keys then press the ENTER key to validate the selection The default it setting displays the column inlet pressures column flow rate split ratio sampling time and the split mode Display Customization Inlet Pressure Column Flow Rate _On Linear Velocity Off Total Flow Rate gff split Ratio _ n septum Purge Flow Rate Off sampling Time _On Split Hode _On Control Mode gff Fig 8 4 1 Customizing the Set key main screen GC 2014 101 1209 602014 eee 29 9 Monitoring the GC 9 1 MONIT key Main Screen 9 1 1 Screen description Press the MONIT key to display the main monitor screen shown in Fig
201. nalytical conditions for an unknown sample or a sample which will gener ate an unpredictable elution attend use an initial program with a temperature increase rate of approximately 10 C min Based on the results check the temperature range in which the peaks appear then examine the analytical conditions This procedure facilitates time pro gram development H Injection counter The injection port septum and the glass insert are required to be inspected and replaced periodically The GC 2014 probides a function which counts the number of injections When the number of injections exceeds the limit you are prompted to perform maintenance What is actually counted is the number of START times Select the analysis counter on the DIAG key screen to set and reset the counter limit Set the limit to perform maintenance on a regular basis The septum glass insert replacement cycle varies depending on the analytical conditions and samples If the glass insert is easily contaminated when analyzing non volatile com punds for example set a low counter limit On the other hand when analyzing cleaner sam ples the limit can be increased E Starting up the GC Turn on the power and or press the SYSTEM key to display the GC starup screen On this screen specify the files used for instrument startup and instrument cleaning column bake out Press Start GC PF menu to start temperature control of each heated zone accoding to the parameter
202. nd the temperature program v Start GC control v Set the detector Set parameters on the FLOW key screen Set the column inner diameter column length and the film thickness on Column PF menu For the SPL and WBL set the purge flow rate on Purge as well When the column flow rate is set by the AFC changing the column temperature changes the column flow rate Set the temperatures on the INJ and DET key screens If the detector is set to Off turn it On When the APC is used set hydrogen air makeup gas etc from DET Gas PF menu From the screen of the COL key set the column initial temperature and the temperature program Temperature settings must be within the allowable column and detector ranges Press the SYSTEM key to display the main screen Press Start GC PF menu to start GC control Press the MONIT key and ensure that the temperature of each zone the gas flow rate the gas pressure etc are correct From the screen of the DET key set the range and the time filter constant Ensure that the temperature of the detector is rising then ignite the FID or set the TCD current value When all parameters reach their respective setup values the STATUS indicator light becomes green and the system is ready for analysis When the dual packed INJ is used a monitor injection screen to show the inlet to be used appears The default zero parameter Zero at Ready
203. nother key and continue operation Overflow of calculated pressure value Code Message CS 5006 CAR1 calc prss out of range No 5007 CAR2 calc prss out of range No 5008 CAR3 calc prss out of range No The carrier gas pressure is calculated from the linear velocity flow rate or the split ratio The value you have input is outside the set range Change the conditions so that the pressure is within the set range and enter a new value Overflow of calculated flow rate value Code Message CS 5009 CAR1 calc flow out of range No 5010 CAR2 calc flow out of range No 5011 CAR3 calc flow out of range No The carrier gas total flow rate is calculated from the split ratio or the pressure The value you have input is outside the set range Change the conditions and enter a new value GC 2014 3 gt 297 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages Overflow of calculated APC pressure value MUP makeup HGN hydrogen AlR air PUR purge Code Message CS 5012 MUP1 calc prss out of range No 5013 HGN1 calc prss out of range No 5014 AIR1 calc prss out of range No 5015 MUP2 calc prss out of range No 5016 HGN2 calc prss out of range No 5017 AIR2 calc prss out of range No 5018 MUP3 calc prss out of range No 5019 HGN3 calc prss out of range No 5020 AIR3 calc prss out of ran
204. nsulator using a cutting knife etc as shown in Fig 3 5 2 a The heat insulator is approximately 3cm thick Cut the sheet metal on the bottom of the heat insulator as well 8 Move the cut heat insulator to the left Fig 3 5 2 b 9 Insert the dual INJ on top of the heat insulator that has been taken out in step 6 and fasten it with three screws Refer to Fig 3 5 2 c 10 Connect the wiring that has been removed in step 4 to the dual INJ as it was originally op F ws sems screws flat onl Fig 3 5 2 c 44 gt GC 2014 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 3 5 Packed Analysis Using the Single DET 3 gt E Setting analytical flow lines Setting analytical flow lines is described below For procedures to install columns and input analytical conditions refer to the operation manual Seta line 1 Press the SET key and then press the PF2 key Line Config 2 Set the dual INJ DINJ and single DE
205. ny detector other than an FID its set temperature must be within the valid range of the detector Makeup flow rate The range and default value depends upon the kind of detector Refer to the values given for each detector This sets the flow rate of an inert gas supplied to the detector side during clean up e AMC L AMC R Flow rate Range 0 0 100 0 ml min Default 50 0 ml min Sets the AMC L R flow rate for the clean up method Usually equivalent to the flow rate of the inert gas supplied to the detector GC 2014 83 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 2 Specifying Clean Up Parameters This item is only valid when DAFC is set to AMC LR e AUXAPC Pressure Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Default 100 0 kPa Sets the AUX APC pressure for the clean up method This item is only valid when an AUX APC has been installed e AUXAMC Flow rate Range 0 0 100 0 ml min Default 50 0 ml min Sets the AUXAMC flow rate for the clean up method This item is only valid when an AUX AMC has been installed NOTE When a manual flow controller is used turn the control of the pressure regulator to set a pressure E Clean up column oven temperature program The clean up temperature program consists of a single program ramp CLEAN UP RATE Range END 250 00 250 00C min Default END Sets the rate of column temperature increase for the clean up program CLEAN UP TEMP Range 0 0 450 0 C Default 25 0 C Sets the final temperature for the column oven temper
206. o adjustment of DET 2 Frees zero adjustment of DET 2 53 Performs zero adjustment of DET 3 Frees zero adjustment of DET 3 54 Performs zero adjustment of DET 4 Frees zero adjustment of DET 4 Turns on CAR1 gas saver Turns off CAR1 gas saver 61 Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Returns split ratio to value of analysis ratio 1 parameter GC 2014 279 17 Printing 17 4 Event No No Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 62 Turns on CAR1 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split ratio 2 Turns off CAR1 gas saver Returns split ratio to value of analysis parameter 63 Turns on CAR2 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split ratio 1 Turns off CAR2 gas saver Returns split ratio to value of analysis parameter 64 Turns on CAR2 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split ratio 2 Turns off CAR2 gas saver Returns split ratio to value of analysis parameter 71 Ignites frame Extinguishes frame 81 Turns on feedback of FTD 1 Turns off feedback of FTD 1 82 Turns on feedback of FTD 2 Turns off feedback of FTD 2 83 Turns on feedback of FTD 3 Turns off feedback of FTD 3 84 Turns on feedback of FTD 4 Turns off feedback of FTD 4 91 N O contact between two contacts in one circuit N C contact between t
207. o confirm the total time that the CRG has been On The CRG is an optional accessory If the coolant consumption exceeds the time limit specified setting to warn a warning message is displayed Replace the gas supply 14 4 1 Screen description Select 4 COOLANT CONSUMPTION from the DIAG key main screen to display the Coolant consumption screen shown in Fig 14 4 1 Mi ooo MT Use Counter Yeg Consumption min a Setting to warn min 16 De UN Use Counter 4 gt Hog Consumption min O Setting to warn min a Fig 14 4 1 Coolant consumption sets screen screen 190 GC 2014 14 Diagnosis 14 4 Coolant Consumption Counter 14 4 2 Parameter list USE COUNTER Selection Yes No Default Yes CONSUMPTION Default Omin The total time that the CRG is Or is displayed Refer to 15 5 Setting the CRG Parameters SETTING TO WARN Range 0 9999min Default 100min NOTE The coolant consumption time depends on the gas cylinder volume and the number of analyses which requier CRG Set the warning time according to the analysis conditions 14 4 3 PF menu Reference PF menu Description x section Reset Resets the Use counter A GC 2014 gt 191 29 14 Diagnosis 14 5 Standard Installation Test After the system has been installed by your Shimadzu representative the standard installation test is performed to check whether the system is functioning pr
208. o that carrier gas flows for the set time prior to temperature control of the heated zones Selection of the analysis column is very important in GC analysis In general select a liquid phase whose polarity and chemical characteristics are similar to those of the analysis target compound to obtain good peak shape However highly polar columns require low temperatures and do not last long Therefore when analyzing an unknown sample begin by analyzing it on a neutral column with a higher allowable temperature limit Switch to a more polar column if necessary E Sample injection modes Capillary column analysis Split injection In capillary columns the inner diameter is small and the sample load capacity is low Unlike packed columns only a small 1 2 uL amount of sample can be injected at onetime The split injection mode only allows part of the injected sample to enter the column This method is useful for samples of high consentration or about which nothing is known Try to perform a split injection method first Set the split ratio to approximately 1 50 If the target peak is too large increase the split ratio If the target peak is too small or cannot be detected decrease the split ratio Select a proper split ratio in this way If the peak is still small with a split ratio set to 1 10 or less try the splitless injection method Splitless injection In the splitless injection method almost all of the sample amount injected is intr
209. oduced in the column by temporarily suspending the split flow This method is effective for analyzing a low concentration sample which cannot be easily analyzed by the split injection method To reduce band broadening and sharpen peaks create a temperature ramp program The column initial temperature is set to a temperature lower than the boiling point of the sample solvent Direct injection In the direct injection method almost the entire amount of injected sample is introduced into a wide bore column Because the inner diameter of the wide bore column is 0 53 mm or more separation is not as good as that of a column with smaller inner diameter Because the peak shape is broad sensitivity may not be good enough For the direct injection method the WBI Wide Bore Injection injection port is required GC 2014 63 64 5 Analysis 5 2 Notes for Analysis E Setting the heated zone temperatures The temperature of the injection port the column oven and the detector are set individually Usually the injection port and the detector are set to a temperature 20 C higher than the column Never set the column temperature higher than the detector because the detector could become contaminated When creating a temperature program be careful not to set the final oven temperature higher than that of the detector E Column temperature program Use a temperature program mainly to analyze samples with a wide boiling point range When developing a
210. og Read ing Menu screen shown in Fig 14 2 1 og Reading Menu GC Analysis Log Operation Log Parameter Log El Error Log G Diagnostic Log Fig 14 2 1 Log reading menu main screen 14 2 2 Parameter list GC OPERATION LOG Displays the power On Off log and the system On Off log ANALYSIS LOG Displays the analysis log This log records whether analyses were finished and whether con trols deviated from their target valves PARAMETER LOG Displays the key operation log and the parameter change log ERROR LOG Displays the log of displayed error messages DIAGNOSTIC LOG Displays the diagnosis log GC 2014 181 182 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 3 GC Sele log 1 Operation log ct 1 GC OPERATION LOG to display the system On Off log and the heater On Off Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from the DIAG key main screen then select 1 GC OPERATION LOG The screen shown in Fig 14 2 2 appears Up to 50 logs are stored If the number of logs exceeds 50 existing logs are deleted starting with the oldest GC Operation Log Start Time Stop Time 08 12 08 0 Syatem 08 12 OF 50 88 12 07 50 Syeten 0s 12 ar ba Poner O8 11 20 10 05 11 20 20 System 05 11 05 00 82 11 20 10 System 0s 11 07 50 88 11 20 30 Power Estuni lear Log Print Fig 14 2 2 Operation log screen NOTE If there are more items than can be displ
211. ogen Flame lonization Detector FID 13 1 1 Principle of FID operation 0 00000 eee eee 13 1 2 Setting the detector 00 13 1 3 Setting the Detector Gas manual flow controller 13 1 4 Setting the detector gas flows APC 00 0c eee o 13 1 5 Igniting and Extinguishing the FID 000 000 00s 13 2 Thermal Conductivity Detector TCD 13 2 1 Principle of TCD operation 0 0000 cece eee eee 13 2 2 Setting the detector 0 ccc eee 13 2 3 TCD Zero Point Adjustment 00 000 cece eee 13 3 Filter Signal Time Constant 0 0 eee eee eee eee 13 4 Background Compensation 00 e eee eee eee eee 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis 0c eee 14 1 1 Screen description e earo ryan ea a eee 14 1 2 A a ae a EEEE Hire co e aA A ia a eri ce ee 14 1 3 Diagnosis Parameters ooococccccco eee eee 14 1 4 Diagnosis parameter list 0 0 00000 cee eee 14 1 5 Starting the diagnosis 0 00 cece eee 14 1 6 IA A A E stile 14 1 7 Stopping exiting the diagnosis ooooooccocccoccno eee 14 1 8 PE MO sie dr a o AD vy as elles eater are 14 1 9 Diagnosis results 2 ad dinekin ae on oe hae Be te ee ges 14 1210 EN 14 2 Log Reading Menu 2 0 cece eee eee eee 14 2 1 Screen description 000 cece 14 2 2 P rameter list esc screed yuan dante taa oa io 14 2 3 GG O
212. on Default When analyzing compounds with a thermal conductivity higher than the carrier gas baseline peaks are inverted negative When this occurs switch to a polarity of to produce positeve peaks CURRENT Range 0 200 mA Default O mA The TCD sensitivity is approximately proportional to the cube of the current If the sensitivity is insufficient increase the current within the range shown in Fig 13 2 3 The maximum operating current is determined by the detector temperature and the carrier gas type Keeping the current highre than necessary shortens the fila ments life and can cause baseline drift AN CAUTION If the current is turned on before the carriergas make up gas has completely replaced the air the filament can be blown Ensure that the current is set to 0 at first Press the SYSTEM key main screen allow carrier gas to flow for approximately 10 minutes then set the current AM CAUTION To avoid broken filaments and poor performance set the current below the valves indicated by the curves below Current mA Carrier gas He 200 Carrier gas H2 Carrier gas N2 Carrier gas Ar 100 0 100 200 300 400 TCD temperature c Fig 13 2 3 Maximum operating current GC 2014 13 Detector 13 2 Thermal Conductivity Detector TCD gt FILTER TIME CONSTANT Selection 4 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s Default 1s
213. on time full width at half height and peak height of the peaks to be generated Peak Info 194 GC 2014 2 15 Optional Devices 1 5 1 Auto Injector Parameters From the gas chromatograph specify the parameters of the Shimadzu AOC 20i Auto Injector and the AOC 20s Auto Sampler Carousel which automatically inject liquid samples into the gas chromatograph For detailed setting procedures refer to AOC 20 user s manual 15 1 1 Screen description After installing the auto injector on the GC access the line configuration screen from the SET key and then select AOC 1 for the analytical line Refer to 8 3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config Then press the OPTION key If the screen shown in Fig 15 1 1 does not appear press the OPTION key again or NEXT PF menu to display it The screen toggles among AOC parameters AUX temperature gt AUX APC AUX AMC CRG screens in this order OC Parameters med lt The AOC status is displayed sample Wash ae Number of Injection 1 Sample Size ul _ 1 8 Pre solvent Wash _ 48 solvent Wash 1 Pumping _ Viscosity s 1 2 Dwell Time s 4 0 Inj Speed Plunger Fast AOC POWER On Fig 15 1 1 AOC setup screen E AOC STATUS The AOC status can be monitored Screen display Description Inactive AOC is not operating Taking vial A vial is being picked up from the
214. onitoring the Temperature with Temp Mon 0 020eeeeee 106 9 2 1 Screen description ss sir e oa e ccc ee eens 106 9 2 2 PR Men ey ct ech caters bee Re hed hat were Ohta aie Beet oe tear ee eh a ee 106 Monitoring the Flow Rate with Flow Mon 0000eeee seen eee 107 9 3 1 screen description voii a A A Be ae ee ee 107 9 3 2 PE MONO ent ots eth rr dad tengo A ee se Aisi dee oe 107 Zero Point Adjustment ccsc ci A a ee ee ee 108 9 4 1 Screen description os e espe ar weed ae wR ee er ew echt yar nnd dee a oR Rare 108 Starting and Stopping Analysis Making an Injecting and Starting an Analysis o o ooooooommomoo 109 10 1 1 Verifying the gas chromatograph status oooocccoccoccco eee 109 10 1 2 Making manual injection ses ras acc O ae Ale See eto Soe VA ee eee ee Ae 110 10 1 3 Starting the anialysis eiii ant oa tae ae ee ee ea ee ee ey 111 Terminating the Analysis 0 00 c eee eee nee eee eee 112 10 2 1 Terminating the analysis o oococcocccooo ee 112 10 2 2 External d vic S iii tia ele ds ak ee A ee ee Sees A 112 Creating an Oven Temperature Program COL Key Main Screen 00 ee ee 113 11 1 1 Screen description z ase Go See eae Eee a haw ade vin EA amp 113 11 1 2 Parameter li ii tii A ode ace Pa he eed a ead Sees 114 11 1 3 PE Metatron dida ata abc 114 Temperature PrograMS 000 eee eee eee eee eee 115 11 2 1 Isothermal analysis nunana 000
215. op v 3 Run 2 times v 4 File 1 is loaded v 5 Pause at each run AOC v 6 The time program is set up GC 2014 Screen display Edit program Time min 30 0 Edit program End of program Run 2 times End of program End of program A FILES Load HEL FILE Load End of program Continuous Pause at each runt bc Timetmin Function Value 1 34 AP End End of program 36 min Em _etimes Next file FILE1 Pause at each run 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 4 Pre Run Program The Pre Run program controls flow controllers and relays before the analysis starts 16 4 1 Screen description Select 4 PRE RUN from the FUNC key screen to display the Pre Run screen shown in Fig 16 4 1 A Pre Run program is executed after the START key is pressed but before an analysis While the Pre Run program is running the elapsed time is displayed in the Time field on the MONIT key screen Program steps do not need to be entered in order After you finish editing the Pre Run program programs are automatically sorted More than one step can be set for the same time The specified actions are executed at the same time Function Tine Scheduler Batch Time Program 4 Mere Eun BS Direct Operation S GC Configuration Service Maintenance E Stop Watch E Lock Select function Pre Kun ERE FILE FILE Prog
216. operly 14 5 1 Screen description Select 5 STANDARD INSTALLATION from the DIAG key screen to display the Standard installation screen shown in Fig 14 5 1 The installation test can be performed at any time to check for proper functioning From this screen load the analytical conditions of the standard installation test Standard Installation Test 0 FILEO After loading a file used in the standard installation test push PF2 to set test parameters to the file Seu column dimensions before to set test parameters JReturn Unload Fig 14 5 1 Standard installation test main screen 14 5 2 PF menu PF menu Description Rue sence section Automatically sets the analytical conditions of the standard installation test Load When Load PF menu is pressed TEST is displayed for the used file name Unload Returns analytical conditions to their former status me 192 GC 2014 14 Diagnosis 14 5 Standard Installation Test 14 5 3 Test procedure 1 Specify the analytical conditions file of the standard installation test O 2 Example Load File 1 using File PF menu of the SET key Configure the injection port and the detector used to execute the standard installation test in an analytical here However if two or more analytical lines have been configured the lowest No analytical line is set with the test conditions In the standard
217. or Channel Ho oc File Ho _ 4 sample Number of Injection l Sample type 4tandarai Command Slope test Off Clean up 4 Onl Single AQC 2 it s EN Vial 1 GC DP INJ Mk CHD 3 2 Chi 15 C 3 16 Special Functions 1 6 3 Time Program Use a time program to execute zero point adjustment and relay control during analysis 16 3 1 Screen description Select 3 TIME PROGRAM from the FUNC key screen to display the time program screen shown in Fig 16 3 1 A time program starts as soon as analysis starts Time programs do not need to be set up in order After you finish editing time programs they are automatically sorted More than one step can be set for the same time The specified actions are executed at the same time Finetion ime Program LIHE H FILE A FILE Hiie rhegen GC Analysis Time min 5 00 Batch Time min Function Value ine Program 1 1 04 FIDI 2 Dmna E pes FIDi Direct Operation l Zero Adj S GC Configuration Service Maintenance E Stop Watch E Lock Select function Fig 16 3 1 Time program main screen 16 3 2 PF menu PF menu Description peeing New Creates a new time program 16 3 3 Del Line Deletes the time program line at the current cursor position Chng Line Moves the cursor to the next line Print Prints the program to the Chromatopac EZ GC 2014 225 226 16 Special Functions 16
218. ors Code Message CS 4009 AOC command is invalid No 4010 AOC data is out of range No 4011 AOC time out No 4012 AOC2 TRS error No 4013 AOC link error No One of these messages appears during a link failure or communication failure When a communication error occurs the link is automatically disconnected When one of these messages appears check the connection status and reset the link 18 1 5 Detector errors Over current Code Message CS 4101 DET 1 TCD cell error Yes 4102 DET 2 TCD cell error Yes 4103 DET 3 TCD cell error Yes 4104 DET 4 TCD cell error Yes 4105 DET 1 FTD current error Yes 4106 DET 2 FTD current error Yes 4107 DET 3 FTD current error Yes 4108 DET 4 FTD current error Yes Current of the detector is abnormal If the resistance of the filament becomes abnormally high when the TCD or the FTD is in use the protection circuit is actuated to prevent damage to the filament and an alarm sounds If either error has occurred turn off the system Possible reasons for the protection circuit to be activated are described below The set current value exceeds the maximum operating current e Gas is not flowing e Gas is leaking e A significant amount of air is present in the flow line for TCD Correct the error then turn on the system If the system does not recover after several resets or the reason for the error cannot be located contact your S
219. ource file number Src File and the destination File number Dst File then press Copy PF menu The name and contents of the source file are copied to the destination file 0 FILEO Src File 1 Dst File 1 M File Listi W FILE LE1 LEZ LEZ LE4 LES LEG LET LES FILES File has been copied ar Siar Siar Star Siar ee mn CONVUCONaS Fig 8 2 2 Copying File 8 2 4 Renaming a file Select Rename PF menu on the file list screen to display the file rename screen shown in Fig 8 2 3 Move the cursor using the A and V keys to select the file to be renamed Enter the new file name using the numeric keys and the lt and gt keys Refer to 6 3 5 Changing item names for more information Rename File GE A4 FILES A 100000 a L 1 FILE 2 FILES 3 FILES 4 FILE4 5 6 E gt FILES gt FILES T FILE E UE GH GEL EH OPS TU Bk 07 09 O62 bol Return NumerChr LowerChr Fig 8 2 3 Renaming a file 96 GC 2014 8 2 5 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 2 File Management Initializing a file Select File Init PF menu on the file list screen to display the file initialization screen shown in Fig 8 2 4 Enter the file number or move the cursor to select the file Then press File Init PF menu During File initialization the file name and contents are deleted The
220. ow rate etc When the detector is configured in the analytical line the output signal settings appear in the lower portion of the screen Temp t MEE 300 0 Temp it BEN 20 0 signal Polarity Current m 30 Filter Time Constant _ 1s eignal Output Port Chi Eackground sig gave O Background sig comp _ Off Det sig subtraction Off signal Attenuation xl Analog Signal Type Wide Fig 13 2 2 DET key main screen 13 2 2 2 Parameter list DETECTOR CONTROLLER Selection On Off Default On When a detector is set to On its current and voltage are controlled When a detector is configured in an analytical line and set to On the detector is con trolled and its signal monitored However the temperature increases up to the set value if the detector is configured in the flow line even if detector control is Off TEMP Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 25 0 C Set the detector temperature The TCD sensitivity is proportional to the difference in temperature between the detector and the filament Accordingly the sensitivity increases as the detector temperature decreases However the detector is normally set approximately 10 C higher than the final column oven temperature this prevents con tamination in the TCD cell To set the maximum temperature limit refer to 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits GC 2014 165 13 Detector 13 2 Thermal Conductivity Detector TCD SIGNAL POLARITY Selecti
221. owerChr Fig 16 6 18 AUX APC name setup screen 16 6 8 6 AUX AMC Name Customization Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION and finally 4 AUX AMC NAME CUSTOMIZ to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 19 Only listed AMC options can be named To change the names refer to AMOS 2 a 6 3 5 Changing item names AMCA 2 2 eee in 6 3 Basic Key Operations AMCR AMCB o AMCT O00 EEC DE GHI GEL OM OPS STU EWA Ez Do 6eynbol a NumerChr LowerChr Fig 16 6 19 AUX AMC name setup screen 248 GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 8 7 Relay Name Customization Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then 6 PORT NAME CUSTOMIZATION and finally RELAY NAME CUSTOMIZ to open the screen shown in Fig 16 6 20 Only listed relays can be named To change the names refer to 6 3 5 Changing item names in 6 3 Basic Key Operations Relay Name Customization Relay Hame STD Relay I EREC DE CHI GEL O OPS STU EY O Do 6eynbol a Hmerthr LowerChr Fig 16 6 20 Relay name setup screen GC 2014 gt 249 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 9 Setting the link device code When the gas chromatograph is linked to a Chromatopac the link device code must
222. own as a semi auto start Finally an analysis file can be set to begin the next time the power is turned on or the GC is restarted Any settings changed on this screen are reflected in the SYSTEM key main screen art Sequence Next Time File Load 4 gt 0 FILEOS Manual Start Shen next power on Start Flow Start Time min Ae Start Temp Det Yeg Detector On Auto ignite On Clean Up stand Ey Fig 7 3 1 Setting the start procedures for the next GC restart GC 2014 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 3 Specifying Start Procedures 3 gt 7 3 2 Parameter list FILE LOAD Selection File No 0 9 Default Current file Selects a file to be loaded the next time the power is turned on or the GC restarted START GC Selection Auto Start Manual Start Semi Auto Default Manual Start Sets the start method for the next time the power is turned on Select Auto Start to automatically start the GC Select Manual Start to start the GC by presssing Start GC PF menu from the SYSTEM key main screen Select Semi Auto to start carrier gas flow only The GC must still be started by pressing Start GC PF menu from the the SYSTEM key main screen START TIME Range 0 0 6000 0 min Default 0 0 min Sets the period of time after gas control starts until temperature detector control starts The Start Time value on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here NOTE The start
223. peration log lisis da A Au ete eee Ge 14 2 4 Analysis Tog xvi Dada ds da ee ees 14 2 5 Parameter log yl sein cc a de PAA ee ede 14 2 6 Error lOg estimo Reed elds wes Agden oy ated altel had oooh 14 2 7 Diagnostic logas seats pace Bache ee oe ado ee A ede 14 3 Analysis Counter 2 0 00 cece eee eee eee iv GC 2014 14 4 14 5 14 6 15 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 16 16 1 39 Contents 14 3 1 Scree AOS CHIPIONA AAA A Bt 188 14 3 2 ParameterliS tt A Ad 189 14 3 3 PM a AE A a ad 2 189 Coolant Consumption Counter 0 0 2 cee eee ee 190 14 4 1 Screen description aissa ta ste eee ae eee aed oe tie a wh pe edd 190 14 4 2 Parameter list ui Seaton PRG ala le eee ee a OA ee a eae ee a EN 191 14 4 3 A RN 191 Standard Installation Test n ro eoar a eee 192 14 5 1 Screen descriptio 2 0204 442 cede els By das ba dae beaded baw ia 192 14 5 2 PFE MENUS ias a eh eared A arene Ha ag bd Seed Pes a oe 192 14 5 3 TLESt procedure ivi tee bn Sd ee te ea eh ee oe Ok dt 193 Peak Generator iii Sania eek ee ate ee eae eae 194 14 6 1 Screen description su evere eye enact ad bh ae ghee ie eee ee ees 194 14 6 2 Parameter list yee tc hi ha tee ate eel Mast tat able tt Garett octal de entre ste dde educ Se 194 14 6 3 PE MENUS anc hats beat he dae iat ob Nee ee dec phy es Serene Backed Tas 194 Optional Devices Auto Injector Parameters 000 cee eee eee eee eee 195 15 1 1 Screen description esena 000 cc teens 195 15
224. pounds At lower temperatures the high boiling point compounds will co elute with wide peaks Low concentrations of high boiling point com pounds may never be detected On the other hand at a higher temperatures the com pounds with a low boiling point will co elute too rapidly There is an optimal temperature for separating various compounds Using an oven tempera ture that increases gradually controls the elution and improves the separation of all the compounds 11 2 3 Creating a temperature program E Screen terminology 1 ramp temperature program Column oven temperature Initial setting TEMP T1 Initial setting hold time TIME a T2 T1 Program rate RATE b Final temperature TMP T2 Final temperature hold time TIM 1 lt d gt Equilibration time ETIM d Program Program Time starts finishes GC 2014 115 11 Creating an Oven Temperature Program 11 2 Temperature Programs E Program creation 1 ramp temperature program Col unn Polt 0 FILEO Temp Monit t BA Temp program total min 28 08 Rate R Temptt Time min 220 C 2min Init _ 60H 2 00 lst 10 04 26 4 2 aa 10 C min end ___END i I i 60 C 2min i Equilibration Time min 5 0 eeN E A E EE E E E Initial 1st stage temperature Del Line Ins Line Fan Off Fig 11 2 1 Temperature program Example 1 2 ramp temperature program Col unn
225. ps or file is changed to another file Other Set the parameter to input event No Refer to 17 4 Event No NOTE 1 Relay description Relay p Event 91 92 V91 92 Point A or B Switch point Relay PRG V93 94 Point A or B On Off point Event 1 16 On or Off Oven Exhaust Fan On or Off Cooling Fan On or Off AC On Off CRG INJ On or Off CRG Colum On or Off AC On Off Turns the power supplied to the AC connector on the power controller PCB on off Event of On Off point Turns the relay contact on the PRG PCB option on off Event91 and Event92 Switches a contact and b contact of each relay on the CPU PCB standard Event of PRG Switches a contact and b contact of each relay on the PRG PCB option Blower Cooling Fan CRG INJ and CRG Column Turns the power of each option on off GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 3 Time Program NOTE 2 Current range Detector type Current FTD 0 00 10 00 pA ECD 0 00 2 00 nA TCD 0 200 mA NOTE 3 When the dual AFC is used 1 There is no settings for splitter ctrl high press inj mode and gas saver 2 Septum purge cannot be selected on flow controller On Off 16 3 6 Editing a time program To change the contents of an existing time program move the cursor using the A and V keys to the program line to be edited changed and press the ENTER key To change only the time ent
226. ptum purge Turns Off CAR2 septum purge 145 Turns On CAR3 carrier gas Turns Off CAR3 carrier gas 146 Turns On CAR3 septum purge Turns Off CAR3 septum purge 147 Turns On DET 1 makeup gas Turns Off DET 1 makeup gas 148 Turns On DET 1 H2 Turns Off DET 1 H2 149 Turns On DET 1 Air Turns Off DET 1 Air 150 Turns On DET 2 makeup gas Turns Off DET 2 makeup gas 151 Turns On DET 2 H2 Turns Off DET 2 H2 152 Turns On DET 2 Air Turns Off DET 2 Air 153 Turns On DET 3 makeup gas Turns Off DET 3 makeup gas 154 Turns On DET 3 H2 Turns Off DET 3 H2 When the dual AFC DAFC is used as flow controller the following carrier gas is turned On Off CAR1 L side CAR2 L side When CAR1 is DAFC CAR1 R side When CAR1 is AFC and CAR2 is DAFC CAR2 R side 280 GC 2014 17 Printing 17 4 Event No No Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 155 Turns On DET 3 Air Turns Off DET 3 Air 156 Turns On DET 4 makeup gas Turns Off DET 4 makeup gas 157 Turns On DET 4 H2 Turns Off DET 4 H2 158 Turns On DET 4 Air Turns Off DET 4 Air Turns On CAR1 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Turns Off CAR1 gas saver 161 ratio 1 Re
227. quare root of the original signal to the Chromatopac and the received signals are squared in the Chromatopac GC 2014 155 156 13 Detector 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID When connecting the GC to a C R7A CR 7A plus for the first time or replacing the Chromatopac set the detector signal output to Off and perform calibration For the calibration procedure refer to 2 2 Outputting Analog Signals to the Chromatopac R8A C R7A CR 7A plus Linear Select linear when connecting the GC to any Chromatopac other than the C When connecting the GC to the C R8A C R7A C R7A plus and setting the ANALOG SIGNAL TYPE to Linear the optional signal cable linear P N 221 47251 92 is required 13 1 2 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Reduces the air flow rate heats filament and ignites detector when lanite pressed when FLAME was set to Off 13 2 2 4 9 If AUTO IGNIT is set to On on the SYSTEM key screen the detector is Ba automatically ignited after each setting reached the setting value Sets the flow rate of makeup gas hydrogen and air if the advanced Perca Pressure Control APC is installed ier If the Advanced Pressure Control APC is installed you can set automatic Ign Set oe ass A S a 2 ignition and automatic re ignition Default value is On Next Det Toggles to the setup screen of another installed detector The
228. racter as described in the following section on entering characters The character input procedure described below Press the ENTER key to validate the input Repeat steps 2 to 4 to enter a name Press the CE key to delete one character at the cursor s current position T an o a Rename File dE A FILES Und File List TT O SAMPLE PILEL FILE FILES FILE4 FILES FILES FILET Qe uE SCH EEL BON POR STU Ge 07 0 O0 gt ymbol a 7 oO bw Me fetirn NumerChr LowerChr Fig 6 3 5 GC 2014 gt 75 6 Basic Key Operation 6 3 Basic Key Operations E Entering characters Initially the character input screen is in the upper case mode Press LowerChr PF menu to select the lower case mode Press NumerChr PF menu to select the numeric mode Alphabetic mode upper case lower case Key Toggled characters 1 Na gt Bl gt Ch gt Aa gt 2 Dd gt Ele gt Ff gt Ff gt 3 Gg gt Hh gt Vi gt G g gt 4 Jj gt Kk gt U gt Jj gt 5 Mm gt Nn gt Obo gt Mm gt 6 Pp gt Qq gt Rr gt Pp gt 7 Ss gt Tt gt Ulu gt Ss gt 8 Vv gt Ww gt Xx gt VN gt 9 Yy Ziz Y gt 0 0 12 gt 22 gt 3 gt 4 gt 5 gt 6 gt 7 gt 8 gt 9 gt 0 gt blank gt gt gt gt gt x x gt gt H gt gt gt e gt blank gt amp F FP YP OP Pm gt gt bl
229. ram time min 5 00 Time min Function Value A 3 00 Val A 2 5 04 SPL1 Carrier Gas _ On Fig 16 4 1 Pre Run program main screen 16 4 2 PF menu PF men Reference section New Creates a new Pre Run program 16 4 3 Del Line Deletes the program at the current cursor position Chng Line Changes over the screen of Pre Run program every line Print Prints the program to the Chromatopac GC 2014 231 232 16 Special Functions 16 4 Pre Run Program 16 4 3 Creating a new Pre Run program Create a Pre Run program following the same procedure described in 16 3 3 Creating a new time program in 16 3 Time Program The parameters are equivalent to those shown in 16 3 5 Time Program Parameters except for STOP The STOP parameter is described below Up to 100 lines are available for the Pre Run program The possible Pre Run program execution time ranges from 0 00 to 9999 00 minutes Parameter Description End of program The AOC starts after the Pre Run program is finished If there is no AOC the GC starts After the Pre Run program is finished the system becomes ready Auto Manual Stop program After the Pre Run program is finished the GC starts For example select this item to activate a gas sampler switch the valve and introduce the gas sample in to the GC as soon as the program stops After the Pre Run program is finish
230. rature or pressure flow program the temperature axis or pressure axis flow axis is also displayed Use the Chng Graph PF menu key to switch the graph displayed Use the numeric keys and cursor keys to change the magnification and the position of each axis on the screen NOTE If the temperature or pressure flow program is displayed the time axis x axis cannot be changed 32000 Sisgenall Col Temp 250 Signal axis Temperature axis IO Ee Ce Co 5 BER Uo a I GAtten Time axis Fig 9 1 3 Monitor screen chromatogram and temperature program 9 gt To magnify the time axis Oo Zooms the time axis scale Unzooms the time axis scale D o To magnify the signal axis XX OFF ON Zooms the signal axis scale 3L Func g Unzooms the signal axis scale To maximize the display Automatically adjusts the signal axis so that the maximum value of the chromatogram signal is displayed on the screen 1 Keys to move along the time axis 10N gt Moves the chromatogram in the direction Moves the chromatogram in the direction 2 GC 2014 9 1 2 Parameter list 9 Monitoring the GC 9 1 MONIT key Main Screen RETENTION TIME Rt Retention time is the length of time from compound injectio to detection The retention time is specific to each compound Compounds are identified based on match ing the retention ti
231. re sensor used over Back arameter log 300C degree lt The record of the change of Return Display JReturn Display Fig 6 4 1 Help screen Fig 6 4 2 Linked screen 6 4 2 PF menu PF menu Description Return Returns to the screen displayed before the HELP key was pressed Display Displays the explanation on an item at the cursor position Back Returns to the previous screen GC 2014 77 6B GC 2014 eee 7 1 1 Screen Description 29 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM n 1 SYSTEM Key Main Screen The SYSTEM key main screen contains parameters related to starting and stopping the GC When you press the SYSTEM key while the GC is in the system Off status the screen shown in Fig 7 1 1 appears However if automatic start was set the GC starts as soon as the power is turned on and the screen shown in Fig 7 1 1 does not appear To set up parameters related to the GC start such as start time and clean up method on or off press Start GC PF menu The GC starts then enters standby mode according to the main screen setting However if the GC is in system ON mode pressing the SYSTEM key will access the screen shown in Fig 7 1 2 Here set up parameters relating to turning off the GC such as stop time flow off time sleep time etc Once the parameters have been specified press Stop GC PF menu to begin the GC stop operations If no program is running the stop time countdown begins immed
232. rimary Fress 500 20BkPa DAFC Unit 4 AMC LE DTCD Preamplifier ad 2 Set the SPL and dual TCD DTCD on a same line LINE1 is specified in the example below Lines 1 through 4 can be selected Line Configur ti sor SPL ON Detector 10000000000 DFID om DTCD A Option TTT H 2001 AOC NOTE If the dual AFC is specified for AMC LR the indication of DINJ disappears GC 2014 3 gt 55 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 4 4 Capillary TCD Analysis 3 Set the makeup gas reference gas flow rates 1 Press the OPTION key 2 The left L side of the dual INJ corresponds to AMC L and the right R side corresponds to AMC R Start controlling both AMC L and AMC R and set the flow rates and gas types according to the connection of detector adopter and reference gas piping Press kPa MEE Flow 2 gt EG 30 0 He AMC E Or 30 4 He 7 On Off P 4 Set the TCD 1 Press the DET key 2 Set Signal polarity as described below The TCD L TCD R signal is outputted When a column is connected to TCD L and a sample that a plus peak is detected is injected The TCD R TCD L signal is outputted When a column is connected to TCD R and a sample that a plus peak is detected is injected Detector ES 4 gt _On Temp tt A 200 0
233. rns Off APC7 flow controller 188 Turns On APC8 flow controller Turns Off APC8 flow controller 189 Turns On APC9 flow controller Turns Off APC9 flow controller 190 Turns On APC10 flow controller Turns Off APC10 flow controller 191 Turns On APC11 flow controller Turns Off APC11 flow controller 192 Turns On APC12 flow controller Turns Off APC12 flow controller 193 Turns On APC13 flow controller Turns Off APC13 flow controller 194 Turns On APC14 flow controller Turns Off APC14 flow controller 195 Turns On APC15 flow controller Turns Off APC15 flow controller 196 Turns On APC16 flow controller Turns Off APC16 flow controller 197 Turns On APC17 flow controller Turns Off APC17 flow controller 198 Turns On APC18 flow controller Turns Off APC18 flow controller 201 Turns On AMC1 flow controller Turns Off AMC1 flow controller 202 Turns On AMC2 flow controller Turns Off AMC2 flow controller 203 Turns On AMC3 flow controller Turns Off AMC3 flow controller 204 Turns On AMCA flow controller Turns Off AMCA flow controller GC 2014 281 No Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 205 Turns On AMC5 flow controller Turns Off AMC5 flow controller 206 Turns On AMC6 flow controller Turns Off AMC6 flow controller 207 Turns On AMC7 flow controller Turns Off AMC7 flow controller 208 Turns On AMC8 flow controller Turns Off AMC8 flow controller
234. rols the column inlet pressure and the total flow rate so that the column inlet pressure and split ratio occur as specified SPLITLESS Closes the split flow line during the sampling time so that the set column inlet pressure is controlled by the Total Flow Controller Opens the split flow line and controls the Electronid Split Controller so that the preset column inlet pressure occurs Refer to Fig 12 2 2 after the sampling time elapses DIRECT Closes the split flow line and the set column inlet pressure in pressure mode or the set total flow rate in flow rate mode occurs When making direct injection analyses select WBI in the setup screen so that SPLIT mode is not available SAMPLING TIME Range 0 00 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Sets the sampling time for splitless analysis The sampling time indicates the period of time after analysis starts until the split flow line is opened NOTE When setting the sampling time ensure that the program time is longer than the sampling time Otherwise the sampling time connot function correctly CONTROL MODE Selection PRESS VELOCITY FLOW for direct injection mode Default PRESS When the injection mode is set to SPLIT or SPLITLESS PRESS Controls the system so that the column inlet pressure remains constant during an oven temperature program VELOCITY Controls the system so that the linear velocity remains constant during an oven temperature program When the injection
235. ry because the baseline level does not increase during isothermal analysis 2 Background compensation is unnecessary because the baseline level does not increase so much even during programmed temperature analysis 1 When single column configuration is set unspecified flow controller does not supply gases Make sure to remove unspecified column to prevent deterioration 2 Make sure to stop the FID detector gas supply hydrogen and air on unspecified side Turn the control of the flow controller to set the pressure to zero 3 Do not cross the columns L R It hinders correct analysis Dual AFC Fig 3 3 1 Single column configuration FID A column is connected to the left L sides 36 GC 2014 3 Installing Packed Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 3 3 Single Column Packed FID Analysis gt E Setting analytical flow lines Setting analytical flow lines is described below For procedures to install columns and input analytical conditions refer to the operation manual Seta line 1 Press the SET key and then press the PF2 key Line Config 2 Set the dual INJ DINJ and dual FID DFID on a same line LINE1 is specified in the example below Lines 1 through 4 can be selected Line Configurati A a E DINJ I Detector E DFID DTCD A Option o a0ci 002
236. s 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Deletes all displayed logs Clear Lo When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the 9 message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the analysis log to a Chromatopac y GC 2014 3 gt 183 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 3 Analysis log details On the analysis log main screen use the cursor to select a log item with on the right and press the ENTER key to display the screen shown in Fig 14 2 4 The screen provides details about each error when the monitored value deviated from the set value and for which an alarm or warning was issued during the analysis analysis Log details 1 30 Error Time SET ACT Koon temp range erorr 1 2 min 25 00 25 58 Det PCOS PCE error 3 3 min 126 151 DETH4 PCE error 2 S lmin 144 111 CARL WEI PCE error 1 2 min 25 25 APC 9 PCE error 2 Semin 104 111 COL AD error 2 S lmin Fig 14 2 4 Details screen 184 GC 2014 14 Diagnosis 14 2 Log Reading Menu 14 2 5 Parameter log When 3 PARAMETER LOG is selected parameter names and new values are displayed when parameters are changed In addition the direct operation of valves etc are also displayed Screen description Select 2 LOG READING MENU from the DIAG key main screen then select 3 PARAMETER LOG
237. s Items which are ignored are marked No Each item is marked either Yes or No For example if the septum counter is marked Yes both the INJ1 and INJ2 will be chacked AN CAUTION At the time of Diagnosis set the Split mode to SPLIT When WBI column is used set the split mode to DIRECT COUNTER FOR SEPTUM COUNTER FOR INSERT Verifies whether the preset number of injections has been exceeded The ANALYSIS COUNTER limit is displayed CRG USE TIME Verifies whether the valve On time exceeds the preset operating time The COOLANT CONSUMPTION limit is displayed TEMP SENSOR USE TIME The operating time for the temperature sensor in use at 300 C or above is displayed Refer to the guidelines for operating time TEMP SENSOR DIAG Verifies whether spiking noise has been generated to detect deterioration of the platinum sensor LCD USE TIME Verifies whether the accumulated backlight ON time exceeds the preset operating time The limit 15 000 hours FAN USE TIME Verifies whether the accumulated fan operating time exceeds the preset operating time The limit is 43 800 hours DC VOLTAGE 5 VDC 24 VDC 15 VDC FTD 24 VDC Verifies whether each DC voltage has exeeded its limit ROOM TEMPERATURE Verifies whether the current room temperature is within the optimal range The range is 5 to 40 C ATMOSPHERIC PRESS Verifies whether the atmospheric pressure is within the optimal ran
238. s INITIALIZE Initialize the RAM configuration and installation settings POWER CONSUMPTION Displays the power consumption of all heated zones SERVICE Reserved for the use of shimadzu service personnel during maintenance or inspections GC 2014 255 256 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance 16 7 3 INSTALLATION POSITION 16 7 3 1 Screen Description Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen and then select 1 INSTALLATION POSITION to open the GC installation screen shown in Fig 16 7 2 appears After installing injection ports and detectors specify the location of installed components by entering the headed zone number while referring to Fig 16 7 3 Gl Installation The component type of installed eas Enter the heated zone number injectors and detectors is Port Type Position to specify the unit installation automatically determined THJ1 SPL 1 position in a number Refer to Fig 16 7 3 INJ2 DIN a DET1 DFID E DETZ DTCD 3 AUS AUKA sa AUS Fig 16 7 2 GC installation setup screen NOTE Set the left installation position for units with two column installation positions such as DINJ and DFID GC 2014 16 7 3 2 Parameter list INSTALLATION POSITION NOTE Range 0 15 Default 0 Specify the component installation location by entering a numeric value from 1 to 8 as shown in Fig 16
239. s EDINJ Yes A Dote E EDFID Drift _No ESDTCD Drift Ho Wait Signal Yes ka Areta Fig 16 6 5 Ready Check setup screen 16 6 6 2 Parameter list HEATER PORT TEMP Selection Yes No Default Yes Indicate which headed zones should be included in the ready check CARRIER GAS Selection Yes No Default Yes SEPTUM PURGE Selection Yes No Default Yes Indicate which injection port septum purge flow lines should included in the check The displayed items depend on the injection port type DET FLOW GAS MAKE UP Selection Yes No Default Yes HYDROGEN Selection Yes No Default Yes GC 2014 239 240 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration AIR Selection Yes No Default Yes Indicate which detector APC zones should be included in the check The displayed items depend on the detector type AUX APC APC1 APC15 PRESS Selection Yes No Default Yes This item is available only when optional APC units are installed AUX AMC AMC1 AMC10 FLOW Selection Yes No Default Yes This item is available only when optional AMC units are installed DETECTOR CONTROLLER Selection Yes No Default Yes This item is available only when the FID is installed DRIFT Selection Yes No Default Yes This item compares the baseline drift to the drift limit for 10 minutes Once the GC becomes ready the GC re evaluates of the ready status 10 minutes later WAIT SIGNAL Selection Yes No Default Yes
240. s However the column temperature limit is saved in the analysis file and is not reset Analysis files 0 9 cannot be initializend INITIALIZE INSTALLATION This item initializes the installation settings of injection ports flow controllers etc INITIALIZE RAM This item initializes the RAM erasing all data including analysis files 0 9 configuration and installation settings Initialize the RAM when there is a RAM problem INITIALIZE ALL This item initializes all settings including Analysis files 0 9 GC 2014 261 262 16 Special Functions 16 7 Service and Maintenance 16 7 6 Power consumption 16 7 6 1 Screen description Select 7 SERVICE MAINTENANCE from the FUNC key screen and then select 4 POWER CONSUMPTION to open the Power consumption screen shown in Fig 16 7 8 Power Conemption Approx power consumption iW Fig 16 7 8 Power consumption monitoring screen 16 7 6 2 Parameter list APPROX POWER CONSUMPTION Approximate total power consumption of all working heaters is displayed GC 2014 16 8 so 16 8 1 Screen description watch 3 16 Special Functions Select 8 STOP WATCH from the FUNC key screen to display the stopwatch screen shown in Fig 16 8 1 The stopwatch can display elapsed time up to 99 99 99 9 in units of 0 1 second When the counted time exceeds 99 99 99 9 the stopwatch is reset and the time restants at 0 0 seconds The stopwatch can function e
241. s A aig a A A Ea ee ee Ren 234 16 5 3 PE MO tit ot seamed ee A angled Wott dee deed db ee tele 234 16 6 GC Configuration 0 2 evi Si ew ce ee eee ee RT 235 16 6 1 screen description wak dh 4 42 debe a dale yah Sheela ie ata tai 235 16 6 2 Parameter Starcie deters ia Maciel eater bled wien ood erg vie Fre EE 235 16 6 3 Setting the date and time 20 0 a i ae a A A E ee 236 16 6 4 Setting the maximum temperature limits ooooococococcoocooo 237 16 6 5 Setting transmission parameters saasaa 238 16 6 6 Setting the Ready Check Parameters o cocccccococc eee 239 16 6 7 Parameter Configuration 0 0 00 ccc tte tenes 241 16 6 8 Customizing Component Names 000 0c cece ett eee 246 16 6 9 Setting the link device code sinp oe a ae eine a E teens 250 16 6 10 Temperature offset aii ee oat Se ec Sn pe A ee eee eet ie hb he eae 251 16 6 11 Other Settings a a A tdi 252 16 7 Service and Maintenance o oococccocnrnr eee 255 16 7 1 Screen description ai aaa ia td A a A AA wee eee 255 16 7 2 Parameter listerne a a es eee 255 16 7 3 INSTALLATION POSITION Si reageren eea na eee tte E EER KEA 256 16 7 4 INSTALLATION PIPING 00000 obli a eG ee a de a 258 GC 2014 16 8 16 9 16 10 17 17 1 17 2 17 3 17 4 18 18 1 19 gt Contents 16 7 5 INITIALIZATION 23 er cvcm met ta arated Satta eA aid 261 16 7 6 Power consumption Lo 262 SLOP TE Lo n 22 O O ahah er cag te
242. s Supply Plumbing E Supply gas tubing There are two types connections in the Gas Chromatograph Type M and Type G Type M connections are located at the main tubing connections in the instrument interior and exte rior The metal fittings contact directly Type G connectors which are used in high temperature areas are connected by tightening three to five aluminum gaskets between the fittings MF fitting OK Fig 1 3 1 Joining Type M fittings BK GF fitting GM fitting f Alminum gaskets 3 5pcs Fig 1 3 2 Joining Type G fittings Tightening the tubing connections Tools 2 wrenches 10x12 standard accessory Use the 12mm wrench for Type M connections and the 10mm wrench for type G connections Fig 1 3 3 Tightening the joints 12 GC 2014 1 Installation 1 3 Gas Supply Plumbing gt E Tubing between the gas cylinder and gas chromatograph Gas filter lt option gt pi M Gas cylinder Fig 1 3 4 Tubing between the gas cylinder and gas chromatograph Use tubing with a 3mm O D and 2mm I D between the gas cylinder and gas chromatograph The use of a gas filter is highly recommended Contaminated tubing or poor quality gases can interfere with baseline stability lt Option gt Gas filter P N 221 05619 01 This absorbs organic compounds and moisture in the supply gas improving its purity The filter can be regenerated
243. s set in the file A start up method should be used to initialize the system once it has been turned on Set the start up method to auto to start the file as soon as the power is on this helps with instru ment recovery after a power failure The initial step in the startup method should be turning on the carrier gas flow After a set time increase the injection port and detector temperatures The column oven temperature can then be set to increase The oven temperature increases last to protect the column from damate and the detctor from contamination The GC 2014 is designed to control the temper atures so that the column temperature never exceeds the detector temperature even if all temperatures are set to increase at the same time A clean up method uses higher oven temperatures than those used for the analysis After set bake out time return the temperatures to their normal analytical parameter GC 2014 5 Analysis 5 2 Notes for Analysis gt E Shutting down the GC To shut down the system select Stop GC PF menu on the SYSTEM key screen Then the system stops temperature control after the period of time set as the stop time flows the carrier gas for the period of time set as the flow off time then stops When shutting down the GC the temperature of each part should be decreased at first then the carrier gas should be stopped so that the column can be protected It is convenient to use the stop time and the flow off
244. scribes the parameter names and the display when a program stops E Event No EVNT Refer to 17 4 Event No E Temperature Heated zone names from a temperature program are printed with the parameter names shown below Column temperature CITP INJ1 INJT INJ2 AITP DET1 DETT DET2 AUXT AUX3 TCDT AUX4 AX4T AUX5 AX5T E Detector range polarity and current value Detector range polarity and the current value from a program are printed with the parameter names shown below Range of DET 1 DIRG Range of DET 2 D2ZRG Range of DET 3 D3IRG Range of DET 4 D4RG Polarity of DET 1 D1PL Polarity of DET 2 D2PL Polarity of DET 3 D3PL Polarity of DET 4 D4PL Current value of DET 1 D1ICR Current value of DET 2 D2CR Current value of DET 3 D3CR Current value of DET 4 D4CR GC 2014 277 278 17 Printing 17 3 Program Parameters E Time program STOP and repetitions When a time program STOP value is specified it is printed with the four digits described below 1 2 3 4 Digit 1 value 0 Continuous When a program finishes the next program automatically starts without waiting for the start command 1 Pause at each run AOC When a program finishes the GC waits for the start command Digit 2 and 3 valves Number of times of run 00 99 00 indicates 1 repetition When both digits 2 and 3 are set to O nothing is printed but the number of repeti
245. stic Log Diag date Status 98 08 12 08 00 Good 98 08 12 07 56 Good 93 828 12 07 58 Good 98 08 12 07 50 Not Good 93 83 11 20 30 Hot Good 38 08 11 20 20 Good 93 83 11 20 18 Good 38 88 11 20 10 Good 93 83 11 05 08 Good 98 08 11 07 50 Not Good Estuni lear Log Print Fig 14 2 7 Diagnosis log screen NOTE If there are more items than items than can be displayed on one screen scroll through the screen using the left and right arrow keys 2 PF menu PF menu Description Releiencs section Deletes all displayed logs Clear Lo When Clear Log PF menu is pressed the screen changes and the 9 message Clear log with PF2 appears Press Clear Log PF menu to clear the log Print Prints the diagnosis log to a Chromatopac GC 2014 3 gt 187 3 14 Diagnosis 14 3 Analysis Counter Use the analysis counter to set the replacement timing of the septum and the glass insert when the counter exeeds the limit an error message is displayed 14 3 1 Screen description Select 3 ANALYSIS COUNTER from the DIAG key main screen to display the screen shown in Fig 14 3 1 Analyeie Counter Analyeie Counter DINJ AOC Wait 4 te AOC Wait 4d Ho MM EEEE Counter for Sept Use Counter Ves Use Counter Ves Analysis counter Analysis counter setting to warn 144 settins to warn if Counter for Insert Counter for Insert Use Counter _ Yes Use Counter _ Yes Ana
246. sults 134 GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 3 gt 12 2 5 Pressure program You can set a program to increase and decrease the column inlet pressure during analysis If high boiling point contaminants are clunting shorlty after the target compounds a pressure program can be used so that the oven temperature does not need to be set higher than nec essary This prolongs column service life 12 2 5 1 Screen description Select Press Prog PF menu from the FLOW key main screen when the control mode is set to PRESS to display the carrier press screen shown in Fig 12 2 8 appears Carrier Fress CARI me FILE Press monitor kPa Program total min Rate 2 PreatkPa Time min Init 104 a ist END Up to 7 ramps of pressure increase or decrease can be set Del Line Ing Line Fig 12 2 8 Pressure program setup screen 12 2 5 2 Parameter list PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 12 2 5 Default 100 kPa Set the initial pressure and the final pressure for each stage of the pressure program TIME Range 0 0 9999 99 min Default 1 00 min Set the hold time for the initial pressure and the final pressure for each stage of the pressure program RATE Range END 400 00 400 00 kPa min Default END Set the pressure program rate If you set the rate to 0 END appears and the program finishes at the previous ramp If you move the cursor
247. sure and flow rate Setup values can be monitored but cannot be changed arameter Locking When the password is to be required set Use Password to USE enter Use Password a password then press Pasemord Lock PF menu Press PF2 key to entering PARAMETER LOCK mode The parameter lock function is also available without password Press Password PF menu to display the password setup screen Fig 16 9 4 Parameter locking main screen 266 GC 2014 16 Special Functions 16 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock E Setting a password NOTE NOTE Select Password PF menu from the screen shown in Fig 16 9 4 to display the password screen shown in Fig 16 9 5 The password is a number ranging from 1 to 9999 The factory set password is 2014 lt Setting a password gt Enter each requierd password and press Set PF menu Enter the new password twice to confirm it arameber Locking Qld Password New Password Confirm new pasaword Fig 16 9 5 Password setup screen If the Old Password or Confirm new password is incorrect an error message appears Confirm the password to be input entering it correctly Only the system supervisor should have password access Change the factory set password promptly Do not forget your password and keep it secure GC 2014 gt 267 16 Special Func
248. t 2 30 0 cm s Sets the average linear velocity of the carrier gas flowing in the capillary column When you set the linear velocity the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter and the length of the column The linear velocity is set separately so that the linear velocity desired occures at the initial temperature in the oven temperature program When the control mode is set to linear velocity the column inlet pressure automatically changes so that the linear velocity remains constant even while the oven temperature program is running TOTAL FLOW RATE Range 0 0 1200 0 ml min Refer to Fig 12 2 5 Default 500 0 ml min The total flow rate varies depending on the injection mode as follows In split or splitless mode the total flow rate is equivalent to column flow rate split flow rate septum purge flow rate In direct mode the total flow rate is equivalent to column flow rate septum purge flow rate SPLIT RATIO Range 1 0 0 0 9999 9 Default 1 0 The split ratio is split flow rate column flow rate When you set a split ratio the system sets the total flow rate based on the calculated carrier gas flow rate and split flow rate so that the desired split ratio occurs at the oven temperature Set the split ratio to 1 0 to fix the total flow rate regardless of the oven temperature GC 2014 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 1 SET Key
249. t asays Siege si pacha tases eats 263 16 8 1 e O aide ana OA AN coke 263 16 8 2 PRIM nU nai ote nok death A a iad A seb ee aia we he Eee 263 16 8 3 Timing with inverse measurement 000 00 263 Key Lock and Parameter Lock 0 00 e eee eee ete eee eens 264 16 9 1 e ica Nye tree O ec tae RS te bole Setanta deere We Vad 264 16 9 2 Key locking 2 65 tor aaa bathe rad add bide beth eee 265 16 9 3 Parameter locking cities 266 ROM Version Nos sssi i etcetera athe eee Ae we a ta 269 16 10 Screen description E cm a ti BOL 269 16 10 27 Parametros A neti tied eae A entire ater ede 269 Printing PINUNO seed wie ee EE Stata betcha Wis Stel ale dba Ae 271 17 1 1 Connection to Chromatopac 1 2 2 0 000 cee eens 271 17 1 2 Parameters to be printed naana aaea 271 AOG commands Fete os tae eee ee A ta 275 Program Parameters 0 0 eee eee eee 277 Event No econo arica dia cor oe lane te el ater oe ed ase iii eceteayse Gale lets ig eeane hee 279 Error Messages Error Messages coveci dee vurr A a ee ee ee eR 283 18 1 1 SYSLEM GHONS 1 4 oy ee ee A Ge eee a etn 283 18 1 2 Temperature control errors 0 2 eet eee 286 18 1 3 Pressure flow rate errors 2s ces ca cect evade nea rra Rete eke bed me bi RE 289 18 1 4 Communication Errors ccs kia yaks Meee Ren a ae eid eal Ace d sun mA Paces arated 293 18 1 5 Detector errors iia odie a i nels Seas eee alee a Sede cd Saw nek ie ed ete 294 18 1 6 Progra errors Li A ieee e
250. teionce section When the diagnosis is stopped diagnosis results up to that time are dis played Detalls When the diagnosis ends the diagnosis results of all items are displayed TES Press Print PF menu to print out the displayed diagnosis results 178 GC 2014 14 1 9 Diagnosis results Press Details PF menu from the screen shown in Fig 14 1 4 once the standard diagnosis 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis is have stopped or ended the Test Result screen shown in Fig 14 1 5 appears Press Details PF menu from the standard diagnosis screen shown in Fig 14 1 4 to display the results of the last test since the power was turned on Once the power is turned off the diagnosis results are cleared 14 1 10 PF menu PF menu Kolum SPL1 FIDA WEITZ TCDE AUES AUAA AUS Diagnosis Report DN T eme AA LCD Return Test Result a P Print sensor Dias MMM Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Good Use Time TTI Fig 14 1 5 Diagnosis results Description Reference section Print Prints out the results of the diagnosis to a Chromatopac GC 2014 3 gt 179 180 14 Diagnosis 14 1 Standard Diagnosis E diagnosis results Good Not Good N T Not Tested N A Not Applicable N S Not Selected N I Not Installed Displayed when the diagnosis result satisfies the requirements Displayed when the d
251. the Chromatopac 4 Enter the Chromatopac channel number when the following sentence is displayed C R7A C R7Aplus Channel No 1 CH1 2 CH2 C R8A CH No 1 CH1 2 CH2 5 Enter Y when the sentence below is displayed to save calibration results on the Chromatopac If they are not saved on the disk calibration is required again when starting the Chromatopac after turning its power off C R7A C R7Aplus Save to disk Y Yes N No C R8A Save to the disk Y Save N No 6 Press the DET key of the GC to turn ON the detector control GC 2014 Y 2 Before Use a 3 Outputting Digital Signals to a Personal Computer GC 2014 can be directly connected to a personal computer to output digital signals GCsolution software allows a PC to control the unit and take data For operation of GCsolution refer to its instruction manual E Connecting the RS 232C cable Connect the RS 232C cable attached to GCsolution workstation to the connector on the back of the GC Fig 2 3 1 To connect one PC with more than one GCs separate RS 232C cables are necessary and an expanded COM port needs to be attached to the PC NOTE AOC built in power source has the same connector Connect the cables correctly Back of the GC OPT LINKSTART OUTIREADY IN GGI ee RS 2320 RS 232C
252. the purge piping of the adopter to the dual INJ so that makeup gas is supplied from the dual AFC through the dual INJ The dual AFC is off the line and operates as an independent mass flow controller Although an adopter and column are connected to the right R sides of the dual INJ and dual FID in the figure below they can be connected to either side L R Dual FID Column Detector adopter with purge Dual INJ L R Dual AFC Fig 4 2 1 Dual FID detector adopter GC 2014 49 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 4 2 Capillary Analysis Using the Dual FID When a detector adopter with purge is used E Setting analytical flow lines Setting analytical flow lines is described below For procedures to install an adopter and columns and input analytical conditions refer to the operation manual L Change the dual AFC configuration 1 Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION on the FUNC key screen and then select 9 Other configuration 2 Specify AMC LR at DAFC unit Uther Contigurations Language English Backlight auto off sec _ 4 Pressure unit kPa Esep volume Hig Beep tone Hi Atmospheric compensation Off zero at Ready n Folarity in Ready _Open SPL Primary Fress 500 9BBkPa DAFC Unit 4 AMC LE DTCD Preamplifier ad 2 Seta line 1 Press the SET key and then press the PF2 key Line Config 2 Set the SPL and dual FID DFID on a same line
253. the syringe needle with a lint free wipe 4 Aspirate an additional 0 5 ul of air Air Sample Plunger Fig 10 1 3 110 GC 2014 E Injection 10 Starting and Stopping Analysis 10 1 Making an Injecting and Starting an Analysis A RA A o eek Aspirate sample Insert syringe until it touches needle guide Push plunger to inject sample At same time press START key of gas chromatograph Promptly pull out syringe AM WARNING Wear protective goggles when handling samples 10 1 3 Starting the analysis Start an analysis program when the STATUS light is green Press the START key to start the temperature program the time program the pressure program and the flow rate program Any pre set programs execute prior to the start of the analysis programs GC 2014 3 gt 111 1 0 29 10 Starting and Stopping Analysis 10 2 1 10 2 2 2 Terminating the Analysis Terminating the analysis When the various programs temperature time pressure and flow rate are finished the gas chromatograph automatically returns to the initial status and becomes ready To stop the programs before their completion press the STOP key The chromatograph automatically returns to the ready status External devices E When the gas chromatograph is connected to a Chromatopac NOTE Key operation of the gas Chromatograph Press the START key of the g
254. the temperature program used for actual analysis Neither temperature should exceed the maximum temperature indicated on the column If the clean up oven temperature exceeds the maximum column temperature indicate that the regular analysis parameters should be used for clean up by setting Analysis Para for the start procedure FLOW Dual packed INJ DAFC is used L column flow rate R column flow rate Range 0 0 100 0 ml min Default 50 0 ml min Sets the initial pressure for the clean up column flow rate SPL AFC is used INLET PRESS Range 0 0 970 0 kPa Refer to Fig 12 2 5 Default 100 0 kPa Sets the default value of the column inlet pressure for the clean up method PURGE FLOW RATE Range Refer to Fig 12 2 15 Default 3 0 ml min Sets the septum purge flow rate for the clean up method The septum purge removes contamination in the injection port near the septum If the split ratio is set to 1 0 the total flow rate remains fixed regardless of to the oven temperature SPLIT RATIO Range 1 0 0 0 9999 9 Default 1 0 Sets the split ratio for the clean up method Set the split ratio to 1 0 for the total flow rate to remain fixed regardless of the oven temperature e INJECTION PORT Temperature Range 0 0 400 0 C Default 250 0 C Sets the injection port temperature for the clean up method e DETECTOR Temperature Range 0 0 400 0 C FID Default 250 0 C Sets the detector temperature for the clean up method For a
255. the unit 3 Do not hold the oven door when carrying the GC because it may break the door 4 Do not put your hands on the rubber legs or along the front rear direction of the unit because your fingers may get trapped under the unit when placing it on a table AAA Gc 2014 E 3 4 3 1 Installation s 2 Power supply and wiring AN WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE 1 Before connecting the power cable to the distribution board turn OFF the power to the distribution board 2 The power supply must have a circuit breaker 3 Do not place heavy items on the power cable Before connecting the power supply verify the following items E Power supply voltage Use a power source with the following specifications to maintain optimal unit performance Commended power voltage 115VAC 5 230VAC 5 Frequency 50 60Hz Operating power voltage 115VAC 10 230VAC 10 Frequency 50 60Hz E Power supply capacity Calculate the power supply capacity by considering the total power consumption of the individual components as shown below Connect the power source to a terminal with sufficient capacity GC 2014ATF TCD FID models 1 950VA 115V model 2 750VA 230V model Optional temperature control block INJ etc 150VA pc Maximum power is 2600VA 115V model 3400VA 230V model NOTE Performance of the unit may be affected if the power supply voltage fluctuates or the capacity is insufficient E Connec
256. time Do not turn off the power before select Stop GC PF menu When shutting down the GC the heated zones are cooled and then the carrier gas flow is turned off To accomplish these in the correct sequence automatically use a stop time this stops temperature control at the set time and flow off time turns off carrier gas flow at the set time Do not turn off the GC without first selecting Stop GC PF menu E Obtaining reproducible analysis results Follow these suggestions to obtain reproducible results Using an AOC 20i auto injector is suggested in order to inject a sample to obtain highly reproducible results Do not increase the temperatures of unused injection ports The GC is designed to perform optimally at room temperatures of 18 28 C Room temper atures above 28 C will negatively inpact reproducibility GC 2014 65 6 EEE GC 2014 A 3 gt 6 Basic Key Operation a 1 Keypad Description and Operation The keypad functions control the unit and displays the operational status O STATUS OTEMP O FLOW START Starts stops analysis STOP key Screen Displays 16 lines of information at a time on the large display area SET key Displays the list of frequently accessed items MONIT key Monitors the GC status and the chromatogram FUNC key Displays items which are not frequenty use
257. time set here can be overridden by entering another start time in the Start GC PF menu screen This function is useful if the preset start time is too long START TEMP DET Selection Yes No Default Yes Select Yes to start temperature detector control after the start time is elapses Select No to continue carrier gas flow only without starting temperature detector control DETECTOR Selection On Off Default On Prepares the configured detector for analysis but does not ignite the FID or FPD The DETECTOR setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here AUTO IGNITE Selection On Off Default On Establishes FID FPD ignition conditions Select On for the FID FPD detector to stand by in the ignited status Select Off for it stand by without igniting The AUTO IGNIT setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here CLEAN UP Selection Off Analysis Para Clean Up Para Default Off When performing clean up select whether to use an analysis method or the program set in Clean Up PF menu The CLEAN UP setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here 7 3 3 Example starting the system with carrier gas flow In this example carrier gas flows for a certain period of time before temperature control begins The length of time the carrier gas should flow depends on how long the carrier gas flow was shut off e If the same column is used in the same analytical flow line as the day before set
258. ting the power cable NOTE The power cable of the 230V model uses a plug Fig 1 2 1 Plug AN WARNING Make sure to ground the cable properly Insufficient grounding may cause an electric shock in the event of a breakdown Be careful to wire the plug correctly as outlined on the next page to avoid damage to the unit or supply fuse GC 2014 1 Installation 1 2 Power supply and wiring gt The power cable for 115V model is color coded as follows Black Connected to HOT of AC line White Connected to NEUTRAL of AC line Green Grounding GROUND Black Power cable E White Green Fig 1 2 2 Power cable E Symbol conventions AC Power switch once e i On Close gt OFF status ON status E Heating energy generation The following graph shows the heating values generated by the unit 3 5 N a al N al T T T T Heat generation x10 J hour 2 a 7 0 100 200 300 400 Temperature C Fig 1 2 3 GC 2014 6 1 Installation 1 2 Power supply and wiring E Fuse The following fuses are used in the GC 2014 Fuse No Rated current voltage Type Classification depending 115V model 230V model on IEC127 F1 F2 15A 250V 10A 250V T F3 F4 5A 250V 3 15A 250V T F5 F6 5A 250V 5A 250V T E Allowing the GC to dry after transport AN CAUTION GC 2010 may get wet from humidity in some transport cond
259. tion mm BH or ION AAA Fig 8 3 2 Line configuration Example 1 2 To use only a DINJ and DFID Select the DINJ and DFID for Line 1 Two columns will make one line DINJ Detector DFID DTCD I Option ffl Aart AQCZ Fig 8 3 3 Line configuration Example 2 GC 2014 gt 99 8 Setting the Analytical Parameters and File Management 8 3 Specifying the Analytical Flow Line Components Line Config In the following examples the PFPD packed column flame photometric detector is installed as an additional detector 3 To use a SPL and FPD for one line and a DINJ and DFID for another line Select the SPL and FID for Line 1 and the DINJ and DFID for Line 2 Line Configuration dd Injector TTT TT oE SPL A E DINJ A Detector M O e DFID DTCD EH PFPD TL Option TTT AOS a001 Ace Fig 8 3 4 Line configuration Example 3 4 When using a single column connected to two detectors Line Configuration AT Injector TTT TT oE SPL A DINJ NN Detector TTT _ DFID DTCD PFPD TL Option TTT a001 Ace Fig 8 3 5 Line configuration Example 4 100 GC 2014 8 4 1 29 8 Setting the A
260. tion location for injection ports detectors for capillary columns layout viewed from the top of the unit GC 2014 47 Check which units the joints found on the column oven correspond to Fig 4 1 2 a and b show the layout for the GC 2014ATF SPL model and GC 2014AFsc model Left and right sides viewed from the front of the unit are indicated as L left and R right respectively SPL A NN Dual INJ 00 0 3 Qe as C gt popa aai ooo 000 Oo pooo gado oo0o00p00po0po00pr0m0mr00000 Dual TCD Fig 4 1 2 a Column connecting joints GC 2014ATF SPL model SPL A NN Joss oooo 0000 oo oooo oo ooog ooo Bas Single FID RBE o0 oo g ingle a oo a ooooooo0o0o000 oo0000000000000 jolla lalala O ooooooooooo000000000 popoo000000000000000000 oooooobo0o0o00000o0o00o0o000 Fig 4 1 2 b Column connecting joints GC 2014AFsc model 48 EE GC 2014 eee 29 4 Installing Capillary Columns and Setting Analytical Flow Lines 2 Capillary Analysis Using the Dual FID When a detector adopter with purge is used To perform capillary analysis using a unit with the dual FID makeup gas needs to be supplied to the FID that a column is connected to In order to supply makeup gas attach a detector adopter with purge P N 221 34012 91 to the joint of the dual FID Connect
261. tion times is set to 1 Digit 4 value File No to switch to after repetitious run is finished 0 9 In order to stop the program input the current file No E Pre Run program START Pre Run program values are printed with numbers 0 4 described below 0 Auto 1 Manual Stop program 2 GC start 3 AOC HSS start 4 Clean up GC 2014 17 4 senno Many parameters are printed with event No The list below shows the correspondence of event No to functions 29 17 Printing E Event No list No Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 Meaning of Event xx Example Event 1 0 Reverses contact status of Events 1 to 16 and Opens contact of Events 1 to 16 and switches Events 91 to 96 contact of events 91 to 96 to N C type normal 4 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 2 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 3 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 4 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option PRG 5 Turns on contact of one contact in one circuit Turns off contact of one contact in one circuit option PRG option
262. tions 16 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock E Unlocking the parameters without password If parameters are locked and no password is required when you select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen the screen shown in Fig 16 9 6 appears When the parameter are unlocked the screen shown in Fig 16 9 4 appears Parameter Locking Press PF2 key to remove PAR METER LOCK mode This screen is displayed when parameters are locked Return Unlock Fig 16 9 6 Parameter unlock screen without password E Unlocking parameters with password If parameters are locked and a password is set when you select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen the screen shown in Fig 16 9 7 appears When you input the correct password and press the Unlock PF menu key the parameters are unlocked and the screen shown in Fig 16 9 4 appears Parameter Locking Paseword Press PF2 key to remove PARAMETER LOCK mode This screen is displayed M Retin Unlock fT when parameters are locked Fig 16 9 7 Parameter unlock screen when a password is set 268 GC 2014 3 gt 16 Special Functions 10 ROM Version No The system ROM version No can be displayed 16 10 1 Screen description Press Version PF menu from the FUNC key screen to display the version screen shown in Fig 16 10 1 Function h ime Scheduler Version 1 1188 patel Build No Time Program El Pre Rim
263. to END and set any numeric value other than 0 the pressure and the time for that ramp can be enterd NOTE The pressure increase decrease program rate control range may be limited depending on the total flow rate setup value the column in use and the purge flow rate GC 2014 135 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 12 2 5 3 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Del Line Deletes a line at the current cursor position Ins Line Inserts a line in line at the current cursor position n PRINT Prints the pressure program to a Chromatopac 12 2 5 4 Setting a pressure program E Screen terminology lt 1 ramp pressure program gt Pressure Initial pressure PRSS P1 Initial pressure hold time TIME a 2 P1 Program rate RATE b Final pressure PRS P2 Final pressure hold time TIM c Program Program Time starts finishes E Program creation lt 1 ramp pressure program gt y 0 FILEO Press monitor kPa ME Program total min 17 04 Ratet PreatkPa Time min Init _ 60 9 2 00 Lat 4 00 100 0 5 28 end END 100kPa 5min _ __ 4kPa min 60kPa 2min o Del Line Ins Line Fig 12 2 9 Pressure program example 136 GC 2014 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System 12 2 6 Creating a Flow rate program If the control mode is set to FLOW increase
264. to move the cursor The lt and gt keys may perform a different function E Moving the cursor using the A V lt and p gt keys Example Main screen of the COL key Column FILES Temp Monit 8 60 0 Temp program total mind 20 08 Rate 52 Tempi Time min Init Be 2A lat 10 00 220 2 00 end END Move the cursor using the A V lt 1 and gt keys Equilibration Time min 3 8 Del Line Ins Line Fan Off Fig 6 3 2 E Moving the cursor using only the A and V keys Example Main screen of the FLOW key GC Start Sequence NOT READY Current File FILES Move the cursor to each parameter using the A Manual Start and V keys Start Time min 10 0 Yes Detector On Items marked with lt and Auto lgnited gt on gt use the lt and keys to change the selection off In this case the selection is changed from On gt Off gt On Clean Up Fig 6 3 3 GC 2014 73 6 Basic Key Operation 6 3 Basic Key Operations 6 3 3 NOTE 6 3 4 NOTE Entering numeric values Enter a numeric value using the following procedure 1 Move the cursor to an item to be set 2 Use the numeric keys to enter a number 3 Press the ENTER key to validate the input The value becomes valid when the ENTER key is pressed
265. toring the GC E 2 Monitoring the Temperature with Temp Mon 9 2 1 Screen description Press Temp Mon PF menu from the MONIT key main screen to display the Temp Moni tor screen shown in Fig 9 2 1 Monitor the temperature of all installed column ovens injection ports and detectors from this screen emp Monitor Colum Temptt a 54 0 SPL Temp ti 30 4 The components that are DINJ Temp t 158 6 3 DFID Tempt 300 0 DTCD J 20 0 included in the current ana lytical line are underlined Return Flow Hon Fig 9 2 1 Temperature monitor NOTE Heated zones without installed components are not displayed on the screen 9 2 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Flow Mon Monitor pressure and flow rate for the injection ports and detectors 9 3 106 GC 2014 29 9 Monitoring the GC 3 Monitoring the Flow Rate with Flow Mon 9 3 1 Screen description Press Flow Mon PF menu from the MONIT key main screen to display the Flow Monitor screen shown in Fig 9 3 1 Monitor the flow rate and the pressure of the injection ports and the detector gas flow rates of the detectors Displayed items depend on ETA the type of injection ports Flow Monitor detectors and flow controllers ACTUAL SETTING SPL Inlet Pre EZ 100 0 Total flow 84 0 Purge flow mm 3 8 DINJ_L InletPrs EGERg Columilo A 30 0 R InletPralE TEE T
266. tray Preparation AOC is operating before injection Rinse AOC is operating after injection Putting vial A vial is being returned to the tray Wait AOC is waiting for analysis GC 2014 195 15 Optional Devices 15 1 Auto Injector Parameters 15 1 2 Parameter list SAMPLE WASH Range 0 99 Default 2 Set the number of times to rinse the syringe with sample before injection NUMBER OF INJECTION Range 0 99 Default 1 Set the number of times the sample should be injected SAMPLE SIZE Range 0 1 8 0 ul Default 1 0 pl Set the sample injection amount PRE SOLVENT WASH Range 0 99 Default 0 Set the number of times to rinse the syringe with solvent before injection This item is valid only when the injection mode is set to 0 normal SOLVENT WASH Range 0 99 Default 1 Set the number of times to rinse the syringe with solvent after injection PUMPING Range 0 99 Default 5 Set the number of times to raise and lower the plunger with the needle inside the sample to eleminate syringe air bubbles VISCOSITY Range 0 0 99 9 sec Default 0 2 sec During rinsing with sample and pumping the system waits for the specified period of time When aspirating sample before injection the system waits for either the valve set here or 4 seconds which ever is longer The wait time during rinsing with solvent is always 0 2 seconds DWELL TIME Range 0 0 99 9 sec Default 0 0 sec Set the length of time for the syringe to remain i
267. ts the period of time between the end of temperature detector control and the end of gas control This item cannot be set if Flow Control is Cont that is if carrier gas is kept flowing The FLOW OFF TIME setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here 88 GC 2014 7 Starting and Stopping the GC SYSTEM 7 4 Specifying the Stop Procedures 3 gt FLOW CONTROL Selection End Cont Default Cont Select End to end gas control after the flow off time elapses Select Cont to continue the carrier gas flow The GAS CONTROL setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here SLEEP TIME Range 0 1 6000 0 min Default because the RESTART GC could be set to Off Sets the period of time after temperature detector control ends until the GC restarts This item cannot be set if the GC is not set to restart automatically The SLEEP TIME setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here RESTART GC Selection On Off Default Off Select On to restart the GC once the sleep time has elapsed Select Off to not restart the GC automatically The Restart GC setting on the SYSTEM key main screen is set here 7 4 3 System shut down examples The following examples show various situations where STOP TIME and FLOW OFF TIME can be used effectively After the end of an analysis each heated zone is cooled Once the column over is cool carrier gas flow is shut off STOP TIME 0 minutes
268. tup screen for next item Y Cancel Cancels the schedule being created E 16 2 7 Editing a batch schedule To change an existing batch processing schedule move the cursor using the A and V keys to the schedule to be edited and press the ENTER key The schedule to be edited appears on the edit screen To change the vial number enter the new number from the edit screen and press Finish PFmenu To change the other parameters move the cursor and make the change from the edit screen and then press Finish PFmenu To cancel the edits and restore the original batch schedule press Cancel PFmenu before pressing Finish PFmenu GC 2014 gt 223 16 Special Functions 16 2 Batch Schedule 16 2 8 Batch processing Setup example Example Sample vials No 1 to 3 are analyzed The GC method file No 2 is used The Chromatopac data processing file No 0 is set to Ch 1 A standard of known concentration is injected once Clean up is performed but the slope test is not performed _ Start vial No 1 Final vial No 3 2 GC file No FILE2 3 Data processing file No Ch 1 FILEO 4 Number of injections 1 Sample type Standard 5 Slope test Off Clean up On 6 The batch is set up 224 GC 2014 Screen display Vial Start vial No Final vial No kol sample 4 Inject sample GC file Ho a FILE 1 FILE1 AE ni 3 FILES Dataprocess
269. ture in the oven temperature program LINEAR VELOCITY Range Refer to NOTE 3 Default 30 0 cm s Sets the average linear velocity of the carrier gas flowing in the capillary column When you set the linear velocity the system calculates the column inlet pressure based on the inner diameter and the length of the column and the film thickness of the column GC 2014 129 12 Injection Port 12 2 Split Splitless Injection System The linear velocity is set separately so that the linear velocity desired occures at the ini tial temperature in the oven temperature program When the control mode is set to VELOCITY the column inlet pressure automatically changes so that the linear velocity remains constant even while the oven temperature program is running SPLIT RATIO Range 1 0 0 0 9999 9 Default 1 0 The split ratio is split flow rate column flow rate When you set a split ratio the system sets the total flow rate based on the calculated carrier gas flow rate and split flow rate so that the desired split ratio occurs at the oven temperature Set the split ratio to 1 0 to fix the total flow rate regardless of the oven temperature TOTAL FLOW RATE Range 0 0 1200 0 ml min Refer to NOTE 1 Default 500 0 ml min In split or splitless mode the total flow rate is equivalent to column flow rate split flow rate septum purge flow rate SPLIT MODE Selection SPLIT SPLITLESS DIRECT Default SPLIT SPLIT Cont
270. turns split ratio to value of analysis When GC becomes ready split ratio returns to parameter value of analysis parameter Turns On CAR1 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR1 gas saver split Turns Off CAR1 gas saver 162 ratio 2 Returns split ratio to value of analysis When GC becomes ready split ratio returns to parameter value of analysis parameter Turns On CAR2 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Turns Off CAR2 gas saver 163 ratio 1 Returns split ratio to value of analysis When GC becomes ready split ratio returns to parameter value of analysis parameter Turns On CAR1 gas saver Sets split ratio to value of CAR2 gas saver split Turns Off CAR2 gas saver 164 ratio 2 Returns split ratio to value of analysis When GC becomes ready split ratio returns to parameter value of analysis parameter Turns Off CAR1 CAR2 CAR3 high pressure 471 Turns On CAR1 CAR2 CAR3 high pressure injection mode injection mode Returns column input pressure to value of analysis parameter 181 Turns On APC1 flow controller Turns Off APC1 flow controller 182 Turns On APC2 flow controller Turns Off APC2 flow controller 183 Turns On APC3 flow controller Turns Off APC3 flow controller 184 Turns On APC4 flow controller Turns Off APC4 flow controller 185 Turns On APC5 flow controller Turns Off APC5 flow controller 186 Turns On APC6 flow controller Turns Off APC6 flow controller 187 Turns On APC7 flow controller Tu
271. unctions 16 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock Select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen and then select 1 KEY LOCKING to display the Key locking screen shown in Fig 16 9 2 This screen indicates that the current status is not locked When keys are locked key operations are disabled This function is useful to prevent analy sis mistakes because no key operation is accepted When the keys are locked an icon indicating the lock status is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen When the keys are locked analyses can still be started and stopped and parameters can be monitored E Unlocking keys Press the FUNC key when the keys are locked to open the screen shown in Fig 16 9 3 Press PF2 key to entering KEY LOCE mode Return r Fig 16 9 2 Key Locking main screen Once the keys are unlocked the screen shown in Fig 16 9 1 appears This screen is displayed when the current status is locked Press PF2 key to remove KEY LOCE mode r a INTA IAN Fig 16 9 3 Key unlock screen GC 2014 gt 265 16 Special Functions 16 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock 16 9 3 Parameter locking Select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen and then select 2 PARAMETER LOCKING to display the screen shown in Fig 16 9 4 The parameter lock function prevents unauthorized parameter changes for analytical conditions such as temperature pres
272. uple from the gas chromatograph value with an offset value of 0 input 1 as the offset value GC 2014 251 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration 16 6 11 Other Settings 16 6 11 1 Screen description Select 6 GC CONFIGURATION from the FUNC key screen and then select 9 OTHER CONFIGURATIONS to open the configurations screen shown in Fig 16 6 23 Other Configurations Language 4bEnglish Backlight auto off sec _ Pressure unit kPa Beep volume Hig Eeep tone Hi Atmospheric compensation Off Zero ab Ready _On Polarity in Ready _Open SPL Primary Fress SOB S6BkPa DAFC Unit DAFC DTD Preamplifier xl Fig 16 6 23 Setup screen of other configuration 252 GC 2014 16 6 11 2 Parameter list NOTE LANGUAGE Selection Alt English Default English Switch between Japanese Alt and English screen languages BACK LIGHT AUTO OFF Range 0 9999 sec Default O sec Set the period of time when the backlight LCD display automatically turns off PRESSURE UNIT Selection kPa bar psi Default kPa Set the pressure units for display 16 Special Functions 16 6 GC Configuration gt Range kPa 1 Increase quantity kPa 1 0 1 bar 1 100 0 01 psi 1 6 895 0 1 In the case that the presssure unit of bar or psi are used pay attention to the following e The range of the primary pressure is not displayed in the value of bar
273. ut of control Yes 2106 DetAPC3 makeup gas is out of ctrl Yes 2107 DetAPC3 hydrogen is out of control Yes 2108 DetAPC3 air is out of control Yes 2109 DetAPC4 makeup gas is out of ctrl Yes 2110 DetAPC4 hydrogen is out of control Yes 2111 DetAPC4 air is out of control Yes 2112 APC1 is out of control Yes 2113 APC2 is out of control Yes 2114 APC3 is out of control Yes 2115 APC4 is out of control Yes 2116 APC5 is out of control Yes 2117 APC6 is out of control Yes 2118 APC7 is out of control Yes 2119 APC8 is out of control Yes 2120 APC 9 is out of control Yes 2121 APC10 is out of control Yes 2122 APC11 is out of control Yes 2123 APC12 is out of control Yes 2124 APC13 is out of control Yes 2125 APC 14 is out of control Yes 2126 APC15 is out of control Yes 2127 APC16 is out of control Yes 2128 APC17 is out of control Yes 2129 APC18 is out of control Yes GC 2014 3 gt 291 292 18 Error Messages 18 1 Error Messages NOTE AFC leaks Code Message CS 2130 CAR1 AFC leaks Yes 2131 CAR2 AFC leaks Yes The pressure cannot reach the set value Check whether gas is supplied and whether gas is leaking from connections Gas may be leaking in locations other than the ones displayed AFC valve leak errors Code Message CS 2132 CAR1 AFC valve leaks Yes 2133 CAR2 AFC valve leaks Yes Gas is flowing even if the pressure is set at 0 kPa or the flow rate is set at O ml min If there
274. ven when other keys are pressed However once the stop key is pressed the stopwatch is reset to 0 0 seconds if another key is pressed Fimetiorn Time Scheduler Batch Time Program El Pre fum E Direct Operation B cc Service Maintenance Configuration Stop Watch GaGa 00 00 y 00 00 00 Lapse Time hh mm se 4 A AA 248 Reciprocal Cin 2 42 Return Fig 16 8 1 Stop watch screen 16 8 2 PF menu PF menu Description Reference section Start Starts timing If Start is pressed again when the timing has stopped the stopwatch is reset to 0 0 seconds Stop Stops counting 16 8 3 Timing with inverse measurement When using a bubble film flow meter of V ml obtain the flow rate using the reciprocal number V x Reciprocal number of measurement time ml min GC 2014 263 gt 16 Special Functions 1 6 9 Key Lock and Parameter Lock 16 9 1 Screen description Select 9 LOCK from the FUNC key screen to display the Lock screen shown in Fig 16 9 1 If either key lock or parameter lock has already been activated the Unlock screen appeares instead Function Time Scheduler Batch Parameter Locking Time Program El Pre Rim BS Direct Operation S GC Configuration Service Maintenance E Stop Watch Select function Fig 16 9 1 Lock menu screen 264 GC 2014 16 9 2 Key locking 16 Special F
275. wo contacts in one circuit 92 N O contact between two contacts in one circuit N C contact between two contacts in one circuit 93 N O contact between two contacts in one circuit option PRG N C contact between two contacts in one circuit option PRG 94 N O contact between two contacts in one circuit option PRG N C contact between two contacts in one circuit option PRG 103 Closes CAR1 splitter control Opens CAR1 splitter control 104 Closes CAR2 splitter control Opens CAR2 splitter control 105 Turns On AC blower Turns Off AC blower 106 Closes air solenoid valve Opens air solenoid valve 109 Turns On AC CRG INJ Turns Off AC CRG INJ 110 Turns On AC CRG Column Turns Off AC CRG Column 111 Turns On AC Cooling fan Turns Off AC Cooling fan 131 Turns On DET 1 detector controller Turns Off DET 1 detector controller 132 Turns On DET 2 detector controller Turns Off DET 2 detector controller 133 Turns On DET 3 detector controller Turns Off DET 3 detector controller 134 Turns On DET 4 detector controller Turns Off DET 4 detector controller 141 Turns On CAR1 carrier gas Turns Off CAR1 carrier gas 142 Turns On CAR1 septum purge Turns Off CAR1 septum purge 143 Turns On CAR2 carrier gas Turns Off CAR2 carrier gas 144 Turns On CAR2 se
276. xtinguish the flame 154 GC 2014 13 Detector 13 1 Hydrogen Flame lonization Detector FID 3 gt SIGNAL POLARITY Displayed only when Dual is selected for the control mode of the dual FID Selection Default Set to to output after subtracting the right side cell signal from the left side cell signal of the dual FID and set to for the opposite FILTER TIME CONSTANT Selection 4 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s Default 200 ms single FID 1 s dual FID This constant affects the processing of the detector signal As the time constant increases noise as well as the peak height are reduced Select the optimum value in accordance with the peak half width Refer to 13 3 Filter Signal Time Constant CONTROL MODE Selection Dual single L single R Default Dual Set to Dual when connecting two columns to the dual FID and Single L or R when connecting one column SIGNAL OUTPUT PORT Selection Off Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Default Channel is automatically assigned Select the digital and analog signals output channels Four channels are available However for analog output only Ch1 and Ch2 are available as standard BACKGROUND SIG SAVE Selection Off Buff 1 Buff 2 Default Off Background baseline signals can be saved for the purpose of background subtraction BACKGROUND SIG COMP Selection Off Buff 1 Buff 2 Default Off Subtracts the saved background signal baseline from the actual baseline This produces a
277. y recognized and displayed DET APC No For display only When the slot No is selected for each installed detector gas flow controller the name DET APC 1 to DET APC 4 is automatically assigned to each flow controller UNIT TYPE For display only When an APC is installed the APC type is displayed for the Slot No selected APC 1ch indicates an APC for ECD TCD APC 2ch indicates an APC for FPD APC 3ch indicates an APC for FID FTD When manual flow controllers are selected DET GAS is automatically displayed SLOT NO Selection NON SLOT2 6 MSLOT1 7 Default NON When a manual flow controller is installed specify the installation location slot no from among MSLOT1 7 When a APC is installed select an available Slot No Slot No which have already been set cannot be selected When CONT TYPE is WDFID for dual FID or TCD L for packed TCD two DET APC numbers and slots are displayed Only the upper lines can be set When a manual flow controller is used enter the smaller slot no among the pair 2 slots Example If MSLOT4 and MSLOT 5 are available specify MSLOT4 Two units of the same type of APCs need to be installed on slots next to each other because piping for two units is set An APC for the L side is installed on the slot with the smaller number so set the slot no on the L side to the upper line An APC installed on the next slot is automatically set on the R side For example when the L side is set o

GC-2014 Gas Chromatograph INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents